660607

Canon PowerShot G9X Mark II Handleiding

3
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/219
Pagina verder
1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
© CANON INC. 2017 CEL-SW8CA210
● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety
Precautions” (
=
14) section, before using the camera.
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera
properly.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
ENGLISH
Camera User Guide
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
● SD memory cards*
1
● SDHC memory cards *
1
*
2
● SDXC memory cards*
1
*
2
*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veried to work with the camera.
*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
Before Use
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-13L*
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Wrist Strap
* Do not peel o the adhesive covering from a battery pack.
● Printed matter is also included.
● A memory card is not included (
=
2).
3
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Conventions in This Guide
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding
controls in “Part Names” (
=
4).
[ ] Control ring (10) on front
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets.
●
: Important information you should know
●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●
: Indicates touch-screen operations
●
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
● The symbols “
Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and aliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
● The user’s unauthorized photographing or recording (video and/or
sound) of people or copyrighted materials may invade the privacy of
such people and/or may violate others’ legal rights, including copyright
and other intellectual property rights, even when such photographing
or recording is intended solely for personal use.
● For information on camera warranty or Canon Customer Support,
please refer to the warranty information provided with your camera
User Manual Kit.
● Although the screen (monitor) is produced under extremely high-
precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the
pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be
defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate
camera damage or aect recorded images.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
4
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
(
7
)
(
10
)
(
6
)(
2
)(
1
) (
3
) (
4
) (
5
)
(
8
)
(
9
)
(1) [ (Flash pop up)] switch
(2) Screen (monitor)*
2
(3) Microphone
(4) DIGITAL terminal
(5) HDMI™ terminal
(6) Movie button
(7) [
(Quick Set menu/Set)] button
(8) [
] button
(9) Indicator / USB charge lamp
(10) [
(Information)] button
*1 Used with NFC features (
=
135).
*2 Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this
case, increase the sensitivity of the touch-screen panel (
=
167).
Part Names
(
4
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
3
)
(
7
)
(
11
)
(
12
) (
3
)(
10
)(
6
)(
5
) (
9
)
(
8
)
(
14
)(
13
)
(
15
)
(
16
)
(1) Lens
(2) Lamp
(3) Strap mount
(4) Zoom lever
Shooting: [
(telephoto)] /
[
(wide angle)]
Playback: [
(magnify)] /
[
(index)]
(5) Mode dial
(6) Shutter button
(7) ON/OFF button
(8) Speaker
(9) [
(Playback)] button
(10) Control ring
(11) Flash
(12) [
(Wi-Fi)] button
(13) Serial number (Body number)
(14)
(N-Mark)*
1
(15) Tripod socket
(16) Memory card/battery cover
5
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Table of Contents
Before Use
Package Contents .................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 3
Conventions in This Guide ....................................................... 3
Part Names .............................................................................. 4
Common Camera Operations ................................................ 13
Safety Precautions ................................................................. 14
Basic Guide
Basic Operations............................................................. 17
Touch-Screen Operations....................................................... 17
Touching ....................................................................................17
Dragging ....................................................................................17
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 18
Attaching the Strap .................................................................... 18
Holding the Camera ...................................................................18
Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................18
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card ...................19
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card .....................20
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 20
Changing the Date and Time .................................................21
Display Language ...................................................................... 21
Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 22
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................22
Viewing ......................................................................................23
Erasing images ......................................................................24
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics ................................................................ 25
On/O ..................................................................................... 25
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 26
Power Saving in Shooting Mode ...........................................26
Power Saving in Playback Mode ........................................... 26
Shutter Button ........................................................................ 26
Shooting Modes ..................................................................... 27
Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 27
Using the Quick Set Menu...................................................... 28
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure Settings .............28
Using the Menu Screen .......................................................... 29
Touch-Screen Operations .......................................................... 30
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 30
Indicator Display ..................................................................... 31
Clock ...................................................................................... 32
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ...................................... 33
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 33
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................33
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 35
Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................36
Still Images/Movies ...............................................................36
Still Images ............................................................................ 36
Movies ...................................................................................36
Scene Icons ............................................................................... 37
Continuous Shooting Scenes ................................................38
Image Stabilization Icons ...........................................................38
On-Screen Frames ....................................................................39
Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 39
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .......................... 39
6
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Other Shooting Modes .................................................... 53
Specic Scenes ...................................................................... 53
Applying Special Eects ......................................................... 55
Conveying a Sense of Speed by Blurring the Background
(Panning) ...................................................................................55
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range) ...........55
Adding Artistic Eects ............................................................56
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Eect (Fish-Eye Eect) ............56
Shots Resembling Oil Paintings (Art Bold Eect) ...................... 57
Shots Resembling Watercolors (Water Painting Eect) ............57
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Eect) .............57
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips) ...........................................................58
Shooting with a Toy Camera Eect (Toy Camera Eect) ...........58
Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus) ..................59
Shooting with a Soft Focus Eect ..............................................59
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W) ..................................... 60
Special Modes for Other Purposes ........................................ 60
Shooting Starry Skies (Star) ...................................................... 60
Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait) ............60
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape) ..................................................................62
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails) ...........................................62
Recording Movies of Star Movement
(Star Time-Lapse Movie) .......................................................63
Adjusting Colors ....................................................................66
Adjusting the Focus ............................................................... 66
Recording Various Movies ...................................................... 67
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode .................................................67
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording .... 67
Disabling
Auto Slow Shutter .................................................68
Correcting Severe Camera Shake .............................................68
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom) ........................40
Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 40
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake .......................41
Customizing the Self-Timer ...................................................41
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter) ....................42
Continuous Shooting .................................................................42
Using Face ID......................................................................... 43
Personal Information .................................................................43
Registering Face ID Information ................................................ 43
Shooting ....................................................................................44
Checking and Editing Registered Information ...........................45
Overwriting and Adding Face Information .............................45
Erasing Registered Information ............................................. 46
Image Customization Features .............................................. 47
Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 47
Changing Image Quality ............................................................ 47
Capturing in RAW Format .....................................................48
Using the Menu .....................................................................48
Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................49
For NTSC Video ....................................................................49
For PAL Video ........................................................................49
Helpful Shooting Features ...................................................... 50
Using the Electronic Level ......................................................... 50
Deactivating Auto Level .............................................................50
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 51
Deactivating Image Stabilization ...........................................51
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting .........................................................................51
Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 52
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing ...............................52
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up ......52
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots .......................... 52
7
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) .....................................................81
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ............................................... 82
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ....................83
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode) ...................................83
Digital Tele-Converter ................................................................84
Choosing the AF Method ........................................................... 84
1-point AF ..............................................................................84
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF) .......................85
+Tracking ............................................................................85
Shooting with Servo AF .............................................................86
Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................86
Fine-Tuning the Focus ...............................................................86
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select) ......................... 87
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF) ..............................88
Shooting with the AF Lock ......................................................... 88
Flash....................................................................................... 89
Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................89
Auto .......................................................................................89
On ..........................................................................................89
Slow Synchro ........................................................................89
O .......................................................................................... 89
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ............................90
Shooting with the FE Lock ......................................................... 90
Changing the Flash Timing ........................................................91
Other Settings ........................................................................ 91
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 91
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode ..................................................... 92
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 92
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ..................................... 93
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) ..... 93
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)............................................ 94
Sound Settings ..........................................................................68
Deactivating the Wind Filter ..................................................68
Using the Attenuator .............................................................. 69
Recording Short Clips ................................................................69
Playback Eects ....................................................................69
Recording Time-Lapse Movies (Time-Lapse Movie) .................69
Recording iFrame Movies ..........................................................71
P Mode ............................................................................. 72
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 72
Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 73
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 73
Deactivating Exposure Simulation .........................................73
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ......................73
Changing the Metering Method .................................................73
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame ................74
Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................74
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings ..................................................75
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO speed NR) .....75
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) ...............................75
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings ..............................................76
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast (Auto Lighting
Optimizer) ..................................................................................76
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone Priority) ..................... 76
Image Colors .......................................................................... 77
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance) ................................77
Custom White Balance .......................................................... 77
Manually Correcting White Balance ......................................78
Manually Setting White Balance Color Temperature ............. 79
Customizing Colors (Picture Style) ............................................ 79
Customizing Picture Styles ....................................................80
Saving Customized Picture Styles ........................................81
Shooting Range and Focusing ............................................... 81
8
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Navigating through Images in an Index ................................... 107
Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................107
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions .......................107
Using the Control Ring to Jump between Images ...................109
Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................109
Viewing Individual Images in a Group .....................................109
Editing Face ID Information ................................................... 110
Changing Names ..................................................................... 110
Erasing Names ........................................................................ 111
Image Viewing Options .........................................................111
Magnifying Images .................................................................. 111
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 112
Double-Touch Magnication ................................................ 112
Viewing Slideshows ................................................................. 112
Protecting Images .................................................................113
Using the Menu ....................................................................... 113
Choosing Images Individually .................................................. 113
Selecting a Range ................................................................... 114
Protecting All Images at Once ................................................. 114
Clearing All Protection at Once ........................................... 114
Erasing Images .....................................................................115
Erasing Multiple Images at Once ............................................. 115
Choosing a Selection Method ............................................. 115
Choosing Images Individually .............................................. 116
Selecting a Range ............................................................... 116
Specifying All Images at Once ............................................. 116
Rotating Images ....................................................................117
Using the Menu ....................................................................... 117
Deactivating Auto Rotation ...................................................... 117
Tagging Images as Favorites ................................................118
Using the Menu ....................................................................... 118
Convenient Control: Touch Actions .......................................119
Adjusting the Flash Output ..................................................... 95
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values ...................................................................... 95
Customizing Controls and Display ......................................... 96
Adjusting Settings while Switching Control Ring Functions .......96
Changing Control Ring Settings ................................................97
Functions Assignable to the Control Ring .............................97
Customizing Display Information ............................................... 98
Customizing the Information Displayed ................................. 98
Assigning Functions to the Movie Button ..................................98
Customizing the Quick Set Menu ..............................................99
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu .................................99
Rearranging Menu Items ....................................................... 99
Saving Shooting Settings ........................................................100
Settings That Can Be Saved ...............................................100
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu) .....101
Renaming My Menu Tabs .................................................... 102
Deleting a My Menu Tab ...................................................... 102
Deleting All My Menu Tabs or Items ....................................102
Customizing My Menu Tab Display .....................................102
Playback Mode .............................................................. 103
Viewing ................................................................................. 103
Switching Display Modes .........................................................105
Customizing the Shooting Information Displayed ................105
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) .................... 105
Brightness Histogram ..........................................................105
RGB Histogram ...................................................................105
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies) ........................................................................106
Viewing by Date ...................................................................106
Checking People Detected in Face ID .....................................106
Browsing and Filtering Images ............................................. 107
9
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode ... 136
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu ..........................137
Using Another Access Point ....................................................138
Previous Access Points ...........................................................139
Saving Images to a Computer .............................................. 140
Preparing to Register a Computer ........................................... 140
Installing CameraWindow ....................................................140
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only) ...................................................................140
Saving Images to a Connected Computer ...............................141
Conrming Access Point Compatibility ................................ 141
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ...............................142
Connecting to Listed Access Points ....................................144
Previous Access Points .......................................................144
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ..................... 145
Registering Web Services .......................................................145
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................145
Registering Other Web Services .........................................147
Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................147
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 148
Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 150
Image Sending Options ........................................................ 151
Sending Multiple Images .........................................................151
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................151
Selecting a Range ...............................................................151
Sending Favorite Images ....................................................152
Notes on Sending Images .......................................................152
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) ........153
Adding Comments ................................................................... 153
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ....................... 153
Initial Preparations ................................................................... 153
Preparing the Camera .........................................................153
Using Touch Actions Functions ................................................ 119
Changing Touch Actions Functions ......................................... 119
Assignable Functions .......................................................... 119
Editing Still Images ............................................................... 120
Resizing Images ......................................................................120
Using the Menu ...................................................................121
Cropping ..................................................................................121
Applying Filter Eects .............................................................. 122
Correcting Red-Eye .................................................................123
Processing RAW Images with the Camera .......................... 124
Using the Menu .......................................................................125
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................125
Selecting a Range ...............................................................125
Editing Movies ...................................................................... 126
Reducing File Sizes ................................................................. 127
Image Quality of Compressed Movies ................................127
Erasing Movie Chapters ..........................................................127
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights) ....................................... 128
Choosing Themes for Albums ............................................. 128
Adding Background Music to Albums ...................................... 129
Creating Your Own Albums ......................................................130
Combining Short Clips.......................................................... 131
Wireless Features ......................................................... 132
Available Wireless Features ................................................. 132
Using Wi-Fi Features ............................................................... 132
Using Bluetooth Features ........................................................ 132
Sending Images to a Smartphone ........................................ 133
Transferring Images to a Bluetooth Enabled Smartphone ...... 133
Transferring Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone ....... 135
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is O or in
Shooting Mode ....................................................................135
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Lens Retraction Timing ............................................................ 165
Display Language .................................................................... 166
Silencing Camera Operations ..................................................166
Adjusting the Volume ...............................................................166
Customizing Sounds ................................................................166
Start-Up Screen ....................................................................... 166
Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................167
Listing Shooting Modes by Icon ...............................................167
Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity .............................167
Automatically Locking the Touch-Screen Panel ......................167
Metric / Non-Metric Display .....................................................167
Checking Certication Logos ................................................... 168
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images .................168
Deleting All Copyright Information .......................................168
Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 168
Restoring Default Camera Settings ......................................... 169
Restoring All Camera Defaults ............................................169
Restoring Defaults for Individual Functions ......................... 169
Accessories ................................................................... 170
System Map ......................................................................... 170
Optional Accessories ............................................................ 171
Power Supplies ........................................................................171
Flash Unit ................................................................................171
Other Accessories ...................................................................171
Printers ....................................................................................172
Photo and Movie Storage ........................................................ 172
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 172
Playback on a TV ....................................................................172
Inserting and Charging the Battery Pack.............................. 173
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery ................................174
Using the Software ............................................................... 175
Preparing the Computer ......................................................154
Sending Images .......................................................................155
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone.....155
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and
Control the Camera .............................................................. 156
Geotagging Images on the Camera ........................................156
Controlling the Camera Remotely from a Smartphone ............156
Controlling the Camera via Wi-Fi ........................................156
Controlling the Camera via Bluetooth ..................................157
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 158
Editing Connection Information ...............................................158
Changing a Device Nickname .............................................158
Erasing Connection Information ..........................................158
Specifying Images Viewable from Smartphones .................159
Changing the Camera Nickname ........................................159
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ...................................160
Clearing Information of Devices Paired via Bluetooth .......... 160
Setting Menu .................................................................. 161
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ...................................... 161
Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 161
File Numbering ........................................................................161
Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 162
Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 162
Changing the Video System ....................................................162
Electronic Level Calibration ..................................................... 163
Resetting the Electronic Level ............................................. 163
Switching the Color of Screen Information ..............................163
Using Eco Mode ......................................................................163
Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................164
Screen Brightness ...................................................................164
World Clock .............................................................................165
Date and Time .........................................................................165
11
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Appendix ........................................................................ 185
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 185
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 189
On-Screen Information ......................................................... 192
Shooting (Information Display) ................................................192
Battery Level .......................................................................192
During Playback ......................................................................193
Info Display 1 .......................................................................193
Info Display 2 .......................................................................193
Info Display 3 .......................................................................194
Info Display 4 .......................................................................194
Info Display 5 .......................................................................194
Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................194
Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 195
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................195
Quick Set Menu .......................................................................197
Shooting Tab ............................................................................200
Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 208
My Menu Tab ...........................................................................208
Playback Tab ...........................................................................209
Handling Precautions ........................................................... 210
Specications ....................................................................... 210
Image Sensor ..........................................................................210
Lens ......................................................................................... 210
Shutter ..................................................................................... 211
Aperture ................................................................................... 211
Flash ........................................................................................ 211
Monitor ..................................................................................... 211
Shooting .................................................................................. 211
Recording ................................................................................212
Power ......................................................................................212
Interface ...................................................................................213
Computer Connections via a Cable ......................................... 176
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................176
Installing the Software .........................................................176
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 176
Printing Images .................................................................... 177
Easy Print ................................................................................177
Conguring Print Settings ........................................................ 178
Cropping Images before Printing .........................................179
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............179
Available Layout Options ..................................................... 180
Printing ID Photos ...............................................................180
Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 180
Movie Printing Options ........................................................180
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................181
Conguring Print Settings ....................................................181
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................182
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 182
Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................182
Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................182
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) .................. 183
Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................183
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................183
Adding Images Individually ..................................................183
Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................183
Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................184
12
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Operating Environment ............................................................213
Dimensions (CIPA Compliant) .................................................213
Weight (CIPA Compliant) ......................................................... 213
Battery Pack NB-13L ...............................................................214
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE .........................................214
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E ......................214
Index..................................................................................... 215
Precautions for Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth,
or Others) ............................................................................217
Radio Wave Interference Precautions ................................. 217
Security Precautions ...........................................................217
Third-Party Software ...........................................................218
Personal Information and Security Precautions ..................218
Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................218
Disclaimer ............................................................................219
13
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
● Focus on faces
-
=
33,
=
53,
=
85
● Without using the ash (Flash O)
-
=
33
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
=
40
● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-
=
35
● Convey a sense of speed with a blurred background
-
=
55
View
● View images (Playback Mode)
-
=
103
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-
=
112
● On a TV
-
=
172
● On a computer
-
=
176
● Browse through images quickly
-
=
107
● Erase images
-
=
115
● Create an album automatically
-
=
128
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-
=
33,
=
35
Shooting people well
Portraits
(
=
53)
Matching specic scenes
Night Scenes
(
=
53)
Starry Skies
(
=
60)
Fireworks
(
=
54)
Applying special eects
Fish-Eye Eect
(
=
56)
Miniature Eect
(
=
57)
Toy Camera Eect
(
=
58)
Background
Defocus
(
=
59)
Soft Focus
(
=
59)
Monochrome
(
=
60)
14
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Safety Precautions
● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
● Do not re the ash near the eyes.
It may hurt the eyes.
● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
● Use only recommended power sources.
● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
● Do not peel o the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it.
● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects
inside.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
Record/View Movies
● Record movies
-
=
33,
=
67,
=
95
● View movies (Playback Mode)
-
=
103
Print
● Print pictures
-
=
177
Save
● Save images to a computer
-
=
176
Use Wi-Fi Functions
● Send images to a smartphone
-
=
133
● Share images online
-
=
145
● Send images to a computer
-
=
153
15
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended
periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
● When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your ngers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the ash.
● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re, burns, or
other injuries.
● The slideshow transition eects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
● When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters
(if applicable), be sure to attach these accessories rmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls o, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
● If your model has a viewnder or interchangeable lens, do not look
through the viewnder or lens at bright light sources (such as the sun
on a clear day, or a bright articial light source).
This may damage your eyesight.
● If your model has an interchangeable lens, do not leave the lens (or
the camera with the lens attached) in the sun without the lens cap on.
This could result in a re.
● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately ush with water.
● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord,
if your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
● Turn the camera o in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
16
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have dierent levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.
This could result in injury.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense articial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not push
the ash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Wipe o any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use.
Do not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in re.
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating,
or explosion, resulting in product damage or re.
17
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Basic information and instructions, from initial
preparations to shooting and playback
Basic Operations
Basic Guide
Touch-Screen Operations
The camera’s touch-screen panel enables intuitive operation simply by
touching or tapping the screen.
Touching
Touch the screen briey with your
nger.
z This gesture is used to shoot, congure
camera functions, and so on.
Dragging
Touch the screen and move your nger
across it.
z This gesture is used in Playback mode
to switch to the next image, or to change
the magnied image area, among other
operations.
18
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1
Insert the battery pack.
z After aligning the marks on the battery
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2
Charge the battery pack.
z CB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the
charger into a power outlet (2).
z CB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
z The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
z When charging is nished, the lamp turns
green.
3
Remove the battery pack.
z After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
CB-2LHE
(
2
)
(
1
)
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
z Thread the end of the strap through the
strap mount (1), and then pull the other
end of the strap through the loop on the
threaded end (2).
z The strap can also be attached to the left
side of the camera.
Holding the Camera
z Place the strap around your wrist.
z When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the ash, do not rest your ngers
on it.
(
2
)
(
1
)
19
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
2
Insert the battery pack.
z Holding the battery pack with the
terminals in the position shown (1), hold
the battery lock toward (2) and insert
the battery pack toward (3) until the lock
clicks shut.
z If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always conrm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
3
Check your card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
z Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Move the
switch toward (1).
z Insert the memory card with the label (2)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
z Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
4
Close the cover.
z Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
saved on one memory card, see “Recording” (
=
212).
(
3
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
)
(
2
)
● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Power” (
=
212).
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover
with
visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an
uncharged one.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a dierent format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
(
=
162).
1
Open the cover.
z Slide the switch (1) and open the cover
(2).
(
2
)
(
1
)
20
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
2
Set the date and time.
z Touch the item to congure, and then
touch [ ][ ] to specify the date and
time.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Specify your home time zone.
z Touch [ ][ ] to choose your home time
zone.
4
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button when nished.
After a conrmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
z To turn o the camera, press the ON/OFF
button.
● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), touch [ ] and
choose [
] in step 2.
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
z Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
z The battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
z Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
z The memory card will pop up.
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the ON/OFF button.
z The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
21
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Access the setting screen.
z Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [ ] button.
3
Set the display language.
z Touch a display language to choose it,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
pressing the [
] button before you press the [ ] button.
In this case, press the [
] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
● You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ 3] tab.
● You can also set the display language by touching a language on
the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [Date/Time].
z Touch [ ], and then touch [2].
z Touch [Date/Time], and then press the
[
] button.
3
Change the date and time.
z Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
20) to adjust the settings.
z Press the [
] button to close the
menu screen.
● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack, even if the camera is left o.
● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
20).
22
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
z Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
z If [Raise the ash] is displayed, move
the [
] switch to raise the ash. It will re
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the ash, push it down with your nger,
into the camera.
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images
Movies
Try out the camera by turning it on, shooting some still images or movies,
and viewing them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the ON/OFF button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3
Compose the shot.
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
23
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose images.
z To view the next image, drag right to
left across the screen, and to view the
previous image, drag left to right.
z To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), quickly drag left or right
repeatedly. In this mode, drag across the
screen to browse through images.
z Press the [
] button to restore single-
image display.
z Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
z Once recording begins, take your nger
o the movie button.
2) Finish recording.
z Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
(
1
)
24
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Erasing images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Choose an image to erase.
z Drag left or right across the screen to
choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
then press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, touch [Erase].
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, touch [Cancel].
● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (
=
119).
● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (
=
115).
3
Play movies.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
then press the [ ] button.
z Playback now begins, and after the movie
is nished, [
] is displayed.
z To adjust the volume, quickly drag up or
down across the screen during playback.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
● You can also start movie playback by touching [ ].
25
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your
camera, including shooting and playback options
Camera Basics
Advanced Guide
On/O
Shooting Mode
z Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
z To turn the camera o, press the ON/OFF
button again.
Playback Mode
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
z To turn the camera o, press the [
]
button again.
● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ]
button.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (
=
26).
● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera o when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
26
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this guide, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1
Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display O) and then turns itself o after a specic period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turns itself o. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is o but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway
(
=
26).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself o automatically after about ve minutes of
inactivity.
● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display O, if you prefer (
=
164).
● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (
=
132), or when connected to a computer
(
=
176).
27
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to show or hide the grid lines and electronic
level.
To congure the on-screen display in greater detail, access [ 1] tab >
[Shooting information display] (
=
98).
● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
aect recorded images.
● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(
=
105).
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
4
)
(
3
)
(1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(
=
22,
=
33,
=
35).
(2) Special Scene Mode
Shoot with settings designed for
specic scenes, or add a variety of
eects (
=
53).
(3) P, Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings
(
=
72,
=
92).
(4) Movie Mode
For shooting movies
(
=
67,
=
95).
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
28
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
169).
● You can also exit by touching [
] in the menu.
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure
Settings
z Touch [ ] in the upper right of the screen
to access the Quick Set menu.
z Touch a menu item and then an option to
complete the setting.
z To return to the previous screen, touch
the [
] menu item, or touch the selected
option again.
z You can access the screen for options
labeled with a [
] icon by touching
[ ].
z You can access the screen for options
labeled with a [
] icon by touching
[ ].
Using the Quick Set Menu
Congure commonly used functions in the (Quick Set) menu.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(
=
197).
1
Access the menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a menu item.
z Touch a menu item (1) to choose it.
z Available options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
3
Choose an option.
z Drag an option left or right to choose it.
z Items labeled with a [
] icon can
be congured by pressing the [ ]
button.
z Items labeled with a [
] icon can
be congured by pressing the [ ]
button.
4
Conrm your choice and exit.
z Press the [ ] button.
z The screen before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you congured.
(
1
) (
2
)
29
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
4
Choose an option.
z Touch an option to choose it.
5
Conrm your choice and exit.
z Press the [ ] button to conrm your
choice and return to the menu item
selection screen.
z Press the [
] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
169).
● Available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or
playback mode (
=
200 –
=
209).
Using the Menu Screen
Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a tab.
z Touch a tab to choose it.
z Tabs represent functions (1), such as
shooting ([
]), playback ([ ]), or
settings ([ ]), or pages within each
function (2). Tabs are identied in this
guide by combining the function and
page, as in [ 1].
z Page tabs can also be selected by
moving the zoom lever or dragging left or
right across the screen.
3
Choose a menu item.
z Touch an item to choose it, and then
press the [ ] button.
z You can also choose menu items by
turning the [
] ring.
z For menu items with options not shown,
rst press the [
] button to switch
screens, and then touch an item to
choose it.
z To return to the previous screen, press
the [
] button.
30
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (
=
43),
wireless connections (
=
132), and so on. Note that the length and type
of information you can enter varies depending on the function you are
using.
Entering Characters
z Touch the key of a character repeatedly
to enter the desired character.
z The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
z Touch [ ][ ].
Entering Line Breaks
z Touch [ ].
Switching Input Modes
z To switch to numbers or symbols,
touch [ ].
z Touch [
] to enter capital letters.
Deleting Characters
z Touch [ ] to delete the previous
character.
z Touching and holding [
] will delete ve
characters at a time.
(
1
)
Touch-Screen Operations
● To choose tabs, press the [ ] button to access the menu screen,
and then touch the desired function tab and page tab.
● Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item
to choose it.
● Touch an option to complete the setting and return to the menu item
selection screen.
● For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the
desired position on the bar.
● To congure menu items for which options are not shown, rst touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,
either drag or touch to choose the item, and then touch to choose the
option. To return to the previous screen, touch [
].
● You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text elds)
to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen
keyboard.
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
● To dismiss the menu, press the [
] button again.
31
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (
=
4) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Color
Indicator
Status
Camera Status
Green Blinking
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
images, shooting long exposures (
=
92,
=
93), connected to a computer (
=
176),
connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi, or display o
(
=
26,
=
163,
=
164)
Orange On Charging via a compact power adapter
● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera o, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or hit the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Returning to the Previous Screen
z Press the [ ] button.
● For some functions, [ ] is not displayed and cannot be used.
32
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Clock
You can check the current time.
z Press and hold the [
] button.
z The current time appears.
z If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display.
z Turn the [
] ring to change the display
color.
z Press the [
] button again to cancel the
clock display.
● When the camera is o, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the ON/OFF button to display the clock.
33
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control
over shooting
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Still Images
Movies
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the ON/OFF button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Aim the camera at the subject.
The camera will make a slight clicking
noise as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in
the upper left of the screen (
=
37,
=
38).
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
34
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way down.
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
z Once recording begins, take your nger
o the movie button.
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
z To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
z When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
(
1
)
3
Compose the shot.
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom
bar (1) showing the zoom position is
displayed, along with the range of focus
(2).)
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway.
The camera beeps twice after focusing,
and frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
z Several frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
z If [Raise the ash] is displayed, move
the [
] switch to raise the ash. It will re
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the ash, push it down with your nger,
into the camera.
(
1
)
(
2
)
35
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
] mode,
or operating the camera in other ways.
● Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
● Digest movie image quality is automatically set to [ ] for
NTSC or [
] for PAL and cannot be changed (
=
162).
● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer (
=
166).
● Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and
40 seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (
=
113).
- Daylight saving time (
=
20) or time zone (
=
165) settings
are changed.
- A new folder is created (
=
161).
● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (
=
29) > [ 7] tab >
[Digest Type] > [No Stills].
● Individual chapters can be edited (
=
127).
3) Finish recording.
z Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
z Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images.
The camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot,
which are later combined in a digest movie.
Clips recorded in this mode may be included in Story Highlights albums
(
=
128).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
33) and choose [ ].
2
Compose the shot.
z Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting
(Smart Auto)” (
=
33) to compose the
shot and focus.
z For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
3
Shoot.
z Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
33) to shoot a still image.
36
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(
=
52).
Movies
● Before movie recording, lower the ash with your nger. During
recording, keep your ngers away from the microphone (1).
Leaving the ash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound
mued.
● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
recording movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant
camera shake. To record subjects at the same size shown before
recording, follow the steps in “Recording Movies with Subjects at
the Same Size Shown before Shooting” (
=
51).
1
● Audio is recorded in stereo.
● During movie recording, lens operating noises from auto focusing
may also be recorded.
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (
=
106).
Still Images/Movies
● If the camera makes no operating sounds, it may have been
turned on while holding down the [
] button. To activate
sounds, press the [
] button, choose [Mute] on the [ 3]
tab, and then choose [O].
Still Images
● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
● If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to the
subject. For details on the ash range, see “Flash” (
=
211).
● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
range of focus (shooting range), see “Lens” (
=
210).
● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
● A blinking [
] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait,
or release it and press it again.
● No shutter sound is played when “Sleeping” and “Sleeping
Babies” icons (
=
37) are displayed.
● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
37
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
● In [
] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
children in drive modes other than [
] (
=
38,
=
42).
● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the ash is set to [
].
● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
old) are detected (
=
43). Conrm beforehand that the date and time
are correct (
=
20).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
72) if the scene icon does not
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected eect, color, or brightness.
Scene Icons
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (
=
38).
Subject
Background
Normal
Backlit
Dark*
1
Sunsets
Spotlights
People
*
2
*
3
–
Moving People
*
3
*
3
– – –
Shadows on Face
*
2
– – – –
Smiling
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping
*
2
*
3
– – –
Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Smiling Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping Babies
*
2
*
3
– – –
Moving Children
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Subjects
*
2
*
3
Other Moving Subjects
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Close-Range
Subjects
*
2
*
3
– –
*1 Tripod used.
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
38
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Image Stabilization Icons
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is
automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for angular camera shake and shift-shake in
macro shots (Hybrid IS). For movies, [ ] is displayed and [ ]
image stabilization is also applied.
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake,
as when recording while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
recording movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to
counteract wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [O] (
=
51).
In this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
● [
] is not available in [ ] mode.
Continuous Shooting Scenes
If the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is
displayed when you shoot a still image, the camera shoots continuously. If
the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is displayed
when you press the shutter button halfway, one of the icons [ ], [ ], or
[ ] is displayed to inform you that the camera shoots continuously.
Smiling
(including Babies)
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam and the ash will not re, and
the shutter sound will not be played.
Children
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the rst
shot.
● When you want to shoot single images only, touch [ ], choose
[
] in the menu, and then select [ ].
39
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Common, Convenient Features
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 12x enlargement.
1
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
z Hold the lever until zooming stops.
z Zooming stops at the largest zoom factor
before the image becomes noticeably
grainy, which is then indicated on the
screen.
2
Move the zoom lever toward [ ]
again.
z The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
z (1) is the current zoom factor.
● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The zoom bar is color-coded to indicate the
zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
● Because the blue range will not be available at some recording
pixel settings (
=
47), the maximum zoom factor can be
achieved by following step 1.
(
1
)
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the
screen.
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
72) if no frames are displayed,
if frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames
are displayed on the background or similar areas.
● To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the
screen. [
] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode
(
=
88). Pressing the shutter button halfway will display a blue
frame, and the camera will keep the subject in focus and image
brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
40
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
28).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
z For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
z For Movies: Press the movie button.
z Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
z Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the ash res.)
z To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
z To restore the original setting, choose [
]
in step 1.
● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ 2] tab
> [Digital Zoom] > [O].
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot at common focal lengths in a range of 28 – 84 mm (35mm lm
equivalent).
z To change the focal length from 28 to
35 mm, turn the [
] ring counterclockwise
until it clicks. Turn the [ ] ring
counterclockwise to zoom in or clockwise
to zoom out.
● Step zoom is not available when recording movies even if you
turn the [
] ring.
● When you are using digital zoom (
=
39), you cannot adjust the
zoom factor by turning the [
] ring counterclockwise. However,
you can set the focal length to 84 mm by turning it clockwise.
41
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
Congure the setting.
z Touch the delay time or number of shots
to choose one of these items.
z Touch [
][ ] to choose a value, and then
press the [ ] button twice.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
40) to shoot.
● For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after
your specied delay time, but specifying the number of shots has
no eect.
● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the rst shot. More time is required
between shots when the ash res or when you have specied
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
● When a delay longer than two seconds is specied, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the ash res.)
● You can also cancel shooting after the timer begins by touching
the screen.
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not aect your shot.
z Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
40) and choose [ ].
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
40) to shoot.
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1
Choose [ ].
z Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
40), choose [ ] and press the
[
] button.
42
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Shooting” (
=
211).
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] or [ ]
(
=
28).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] or
[ ] is displayed.
2
Shoot.
z Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the
shutter button halfway.
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
40).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
● With Touch Shutter (
=
42), the camera shoots continuously
while you touch the screen. Focus and exposure during
continuous shooting remain constant, after they are determined
for the rst shot.
Shooting by Touching the Screen
(Touch Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your nger to shoot. The camera will focus
on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
1
Enable the touch-shutter function.
z Touch [ ] and change it to [ ].
2
Shoot.
z Touch the subject on the screen to take
the picture.
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
z To cancel touch shutter, choose [
] in
step 1.
● You can also congure touch-shutter settings by choosing MENU
(
=
29) > [ 1] tab > [Touch Shutter]. To hide the Touch
Shutter setting icon, set [Touch shutter icon] to [O].
● Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next
shot by touching [
].
43
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Touch [Add to Registry] to choose it, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Add a New Face] and press the
[
] button.
2
Register face information.
z Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
z A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
z If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
z After [Register?] is displayed, touch [OK].
z The [Edit Prole] screen is displayed.
3
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
z Touch the name text box to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(
=
30).
Using Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function also enables you to nd shots you have taken that include
registered people (
=
107).
Personal Information
● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
names, and birthdays) from the camera (
=
46).
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to
12 people to use with Face ID.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
29).
44
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
z When you point the camera toward people,
the names of up to 3 registered people will
be displayed when they are detected.
z Shoot.
z Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. The names of detected people
(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,
even if the names are not displayed.
● People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
● Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene diers drastically from the registered face information.
● If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
● If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
image during playback (
=
110).
● Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they
grow, you should update their face info regularly (
=
43).
● Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the [Shooting
Info] check box in “Customizing the Information Displayed” (
=
98)
so that the names are not displayed.
● If you don’t want names to be recorded in images, choose [Face ID
Settings] on the [
2] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [O].
● You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
(simple information display) (
=
105).
● Names recorded in continuous shooting (
=
42) continue to be
recorded in the same position as the rst shot, even if subjects move.
z To register a birthday, on the [Edit Prole]
screen, touch the birthday text box.
z Touch an option to choose it.
z Touch [
][ ] to specify the date.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
4
Save the settings.
z Touch [Save].
z After a message is displayed, touch [Yes].
5
Continue registering face
information.
z To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● The ash will not re when following step 2.
● If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
(
=
37) will not be displayed in [ ] mode.
● You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
you have not lled all 5 face info slots (
=
43).
45
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been
lled.
1
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
43), choose [Add Face
Info].
2
Choose a person to overwrite their
face info.
z Touch the name of the person whose
face info you want to overwrite.
z If ve items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Touch [OK].
z If less than ve items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
3
Choose the face info to overwrite.
z Touch the face info you want to overwrite.
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
43), choose [Check/
Edit Info].
2
Choose a person to check or edit
their information.
z Touch the image of the person whose
information you want to check or edit.
3
Check or edit the information as
needed.
z To check a name or birthday, touch
[Edit Prole]. On the screen displayed,
you can edit the name or birthday as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
ID Information” (
=
43).
z To check face information, touch [Face
Info List]. To erase face information, touch
[Erase] on the screen displayed, and
then touch the face information to erase.
After [Erase?] is displayed, touch [OK].
● Changing a name in [Edit Prole] will prevent that person’s
previous name from being displayed in shots you captured before
changing their name.
46
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (
=
106), overwrite their info (
=
110),
or search for images that include them (
=
107).
● You can also erase names in image information (
=
111).
4
Register face information.
z Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
43) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are lled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
● You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, rst erase
unwanted existing info (
=
45), and then register new face
information (
=
43) as needed.
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
1
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
z Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
43) and choose
[Erase Info].
2
Choose a person to erase their
information.
z Touch the name of the person to erase.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, touch [OK].
47
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 7 combinations of size (number of pixels) and compression
(image quality). Also specify whether to capture images in RAW format
(
=
48). For guidelines on how many of each kind of image can t on a
memory card, see “Recording” (
=
212).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
● [ ] and [ ] indicate dierent levels of image quality depending
on the extent of compression. At the same size (number of
pixels), [
] oers higher image quality. Although [ ] images
have slightly lower image quality, more t on a memory card.
Note that [
]-size images are of [ ] quality.
● Not available in [
] mode.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
29)
> [
1] tab > [Image quality].
When deciding the number of pixels based on print size, use the following
table as a guide for images with a 3:2 aspect ratio.
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 (11.7 x 16.5 in.)
A4 (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
Image Customization Features
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
z Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Same aspect ratio as
35mm lm, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard
sizes.
Used for display on standard-denition televisions or similar
display devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or
A-series sizes.
Square aspect ratio.
● Not available in [ ] mode.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
29)
> [
1] tab > [Still Image Aspect Ratio].
48
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● For details on the relationship between the number of recording
pixels and the number of shots that will t on a card, see
“Recording” (
=
212).
● The le extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
Using the Menu
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Image quality] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
29).
z To capture in RAW format at the same
time, choose [
] under [RAW]. Note that
only JPEG images are captured when [−]
is selected.
z In [JPEG], choose the number of pixels
and compression ratio. Note that only
RAW images are captured when [−] is
selected.
z When nished, press the [
] button to
return to the menu screen.
● [RAW] and [JPEG] cannot both be set to [−].
Capturing in RAW Format
The camera can capture images in JPEG and RAW format.
JPEG
Images
Processed in the camera for optimal image quality
and compressed to reduce le size. However, the
compression process is irreversible, and images
cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed
state. Image processing may also cause some loss
of image quality.
RAW
Images
“Raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially
no loss of image quality from the camera’s image
processing. The data cannot be used in this state
for viewing on a computer or printing. You must rst
process it on this camera (
=
124) or use the Digital
Photo Professional application (
=
175) to convert
images to ordinary JPEG or TIFF les. Images can
be adjusted with minimal loss of image quality.
z Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28).
z To capture in RAW format only, choose
the [
] option.
z To capture images in both JPEG and
RAW format simultaneously, choose the
JPEG image quality, and then press the
[
] button. A [ ] mark is displayed
next to [RAW]. To undo this setting, follow
the same steps and remove the [ ] mark
next to [RAW].
● When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
software (
=
175).
● Digital zoom (
=
39) is not available when capturing images in
RAW format.
49
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
For PAL Video
Image
Quality
Number of
Recording Pixels
Frame Rate Details
*
1920 x 1080 50.00 fps
For shooting in
Full HD.
1920 x 1080 25.00 fps
1280 x 720 25.00 fps For shooting in HD.
640 x 480 25.00 fps
For shooting in
standard denition.
* Available in [ ] or [ ] mode.
● After repeated recording in [ ] or [ ] mode, movie
recording at that level of quality may be temporarily unavailable
(even if you press the movie button) until the camera has cooled
down. To continue recording in [
] or [ ] mode
instead, touch [Yes] after the notication message is displayed.
Otherwise, turn the camera o and wait a while for it to cool down
before you resume recording.
● Black bars (displayed on the left and right in [ ] and
[
] modes and on the top and bottom in [ ],
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[
] modes) indicate image areas not recorded.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
29)
> [
7] tab > [Movie rec. size].
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Adjust movie image quality (image size and frame rate). The frame rate
indicates how many frames are recorded per second, which is determined
automatically based on the NTSC or PAL setting (
=
162). For guidelines
on the total recording time for movies at each level of image quality that
will t on a memory card, see “Recording” (
=
212).
z Press the [
] button, choose the movie
quality menu item, and then choose the
desired option (
=
28).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
For NTSC Video
Image
Quality
Number of
Recording Pixels
Frame Rate Details
*
1920 x 1080 59.94 fps
For shooting in Full
HD. [
] enables
movies with smoother
motion.
1920 x 1080 29.97 fps
1920 x 1080 23.98 fps
1280 x 720 29.97 fps For shooting in HD.
640 x 480 29.97 fps
For shooting in
standard denition.
* Available in [ ] or [ ] mode.
50
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Deactivating Auto Level
Still Images
Movies
Auto leveling keeps movies straight. To cancel this feature, choose
[Disable].
z Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto level] on the [ 4] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
29).
z Choose [Disable] (
=
29).
● Once recording begins, the display area narrows, and subjects
are enlarged (
=
51).
Helpful Shooting Features
Using the Electronic Level
Still Images
Movies
An electronic level can be displayed on the screen when shooting as a
guideline to determine if the camera is level.
1
Display the electronic level.
z Press the [ ] button to display the
electronic level.
2
Level the camera as needed.
z Level the camera so that the center of the
electronic level is green.
● If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the
[
] button and check the setting in [ 1] tab > [Shooting
information display].
● The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
● Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineective in helping you
level the camera (
=
163).
● Not available in [
] mode.
51
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same
Size Shown before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for image straightening and correction
of signicant camera shake.
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,
you can reduce image stabilization and cancel Auto Level.
z Set [
Auto level] to [Disable] as
described in “Deactivating Auto Level”
(
=
50).
z Follow step 1 in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (
=
51) to access the
[IS Settings] screen.
z Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[Low] (
=
29).
● You can also set [IS Mode] to [O], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [O]
(
=
51).
● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
]
(NTSC) or [
] (PAL).
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Deactivating Image Stabilization
Still Images
Movies
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should
set image stabilization to [O] to deactivate it.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
z Touch [IS Mode], and then choose an
option (
=
29).
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions
is automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (
=
38).
O Deactivates image stabilization.
52
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [O].
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed after shots.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Image review] on the [ 1] tab, and then
choose the desired option.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [2 sec.].
2 sec.,
4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displays images for the specied time. Even while the
shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing
the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
O No image display after shots.
● By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information.
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”
(
=
29).
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[AF-assist beam ring] on the [ 3] tab,
and then choose [Disable].
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Enable].
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.
1
Access the [Flash settings] screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
settings] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
53
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more eectively in various scenes, and
take shots enhanced with unique image eects or
captured using special functions
Other Shooting Modes
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
z Touch [ ], and then touch [ ][ ] or drag
up or down on the screen to choose a
shooting mode.
z To conrm your choice, touch [OK].
3
Shoot.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
z Take shots of people with a softening
eect.
54
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ]
mode instead of [
] mode will give better results (
=
33).
● You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(
=
29) > [ 1] tab > [Rec. Mode].
● In [
] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night
Scene)
Still Images
Movies
z Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
z A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Movies
z Vivid shots of reworks.
● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
● In [
] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(
=
74) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [
] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
● In [
] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
● In [
] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [O] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
51).
55
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● To adjust the eect level, turn the [ ] ring.
● For best results, hold the camera securely in both hands, with
your elbows close to your body, and rotate your whole body to
follow the subject.
● This feature is more eective for subjects moving horizontally,
such as cars or trains.
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic
Range)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at dierent brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-
out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ].
2
Shoot.
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
Applying Special Eects
Add a variety of eects to images when shooting.
Conveying a Sense of Speed by Blurring the
Background (Panning)
Still Images
Movies
By panning, you can blur the background to convey a sense of speed.
The camera will detect and correct subject blurring, so the subject will
remain relatively clear and sharp.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ].
2
Shoot.
z Before shooting, press the shutter button
halfway as you move the camera so that
it follows the subject.
z Keep the moving subject centered on the
screen, and press the shutter button all
the way down.
z Even after you have pressed the shutter
button fully, continue moving the camera
to follow the subject.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
56
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Eect
(Fish-Eye Eect)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting eect of a sh-eye lens.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an eect level.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an eect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the eect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [O] when using a tripod
or other means to secure the camera (
=
51).
● Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
● [
] may be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway
in bright conditions, indicating automatic adjustment for optimal
image brightness.
Adding Artistic Eects
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ].
z Turn the [
] ring to choose an eect.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the eect applied.
Natural Images are natural and organic.
Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Art Embossed
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
57
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Eect)
Still Images
Movies
Creates the eect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ].
z A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and touch the screen or drag the white
frame up or down to move it.
3
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
z On the screen in step 2, turn the [ ] ring
to choose the speed.
4
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
z Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
Shots Resembling Oil Paintings (Art Bold Eect)
Still Images
Movies
Make subjects look more substantial, like subjects in oil paintings.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an eect level.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an eect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the eect applied.
3
Shoot.
Shots Resembling Watercolors (Water Painting
Eect)
Still Images
Movies
Soften colors, for photos resembling watercolor paintings.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an eect level.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an eect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the eect applied.
3
Shoot.
58
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting with a Toy Camera Eect
(Toy Camera Eect)
Still Images
Movies
This eect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the eect applied.
3
Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ]
button in step 2. Touch the screen to move the frame. To return
the frame to horizontal orientation, press the [
] button again.
● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
● Movie image quality is [
] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at
an aspect ratio of [
] (
=
47). These quality settings cannot
be changed.
59
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting with a Soft Focus Eect
Still Images
Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus lter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the eect level as desired.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an eect level.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an eect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the eect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Making Subjects Stand Out (Background
Defocus)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot subjects so that they stand out from the background.
Two consecutive images are captured with settings optimized for
background defocus. The background is defocused through lens eects
and subject- and scene-based image processing.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ].
2
Shoot.
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
Two consecutive images are captured
when you press the shutter button all the
way down.
z A blinking [
] icon indicates that the
images could not be processed.
● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
● For the best results with background defocusing, try shooting
close to the subject, and ensure ample distance between the
subject and background.
● There may be a delay after shooting before you can shoot again.
● To adjust the eect level, turn the [
] ring.
60
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
Capture beautiful shots of people against starry skies. After initially ring
the ash to capture the person, the camera shoots twice without ash.
The three images are combined into a single image and processed to
make the stars more prominent.
For details on the ash range, see “Flash” (
=
211).
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Touch [
], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Raise the ash.
z Move the [ ] switch.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W)
Still Images
Movies
Take monochrome pictures with a gritty, rough feeling.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an eect level.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an eect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the eect applied.
3
Shoot.
61
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU > [ 2] tab > [Night
Display] > [On] (
=
163) before shooting.
● To adjust subject brightness, try changing the ash exposure
compensation (
=
90).
● To adjust background brightness, try changing the exposure
compensation (
=
73). However, images may not look as
expected under some shooting conditions, and the person should
stay still in steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 15 seconds.
● To capture more stars and brighter starlight, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ 6] tab > [Star Portrait Settings] > [Star Visibility]
> [Prominent]. However, images may not look as expected under
some shooting conditions, and the person should stay still in
steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 8 seconds.
● To make stars brighter, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ 6] tab >
[Star Emphasis] > [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [O].
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in
steps 1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
53), touching [ ] to
access the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the
same option or [
].
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button. The ash res
as the camera takes the rst shot.
z The second and third shots are now
taken, without ring the ash.
5
Have the person stay still until the
lamp blinks.
z The person you are shooting should stay
still until the lamp blinks three times after
the third shot, which may take up to about
two seconds.
z All the shots are combined to create a
single image.
● Under some shooting conditions, images may not look as
expected.
● For better shots, have the person stand away from illumination
such as street lights, and make sure the ash is raised.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
● To avoid blurry shots, make sure the person you shoot in
steps 4 – 5 stays still.
62
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU > [ 2] tab > [Night
Display] > [On] (
=
163) before shooting.
● To make stars brighter, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ 6] tab >
[Star Emphasis] > [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [O].
● Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
82) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in
steps 1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
53), touching [ ] to
access the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the
same option or [
].
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Still Images
Movies
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in
a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots,
the camera shoots continuously. A shooting session can last up to about
two hours. Check the battery level in advance.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Touch [
], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape)
Still Images
Movies
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in
the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Touch [
], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
3
Shoot.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
63
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in
steps 1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
53), touching [ ] to
access the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the
same option or [
].
Recording Movies of Star Movement (Star Time-Lapse
Movie)
Still Images
Movies
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specied
interval, you can create movies with fast-moving stars. You can adjust the
shooting interval and recording duration as needed.
Note that each session takes a long time, and requires many shots.
Check the battery level and memory card space in advance.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
53) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Touch [
], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Congure movie settings.
z Touch [ ].
z Touch an item, and then choose the
desired option.
2
Specify the duration of the shooting
session.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose the shooting
duration.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down. [Busy] is displayed briey, and
then shooting begins.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again. Note that
cancellation may take up to about 30
seconds.
● If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is
saved.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU > [ 2] tab > [Night
Display] > [On] (
=
163) before shooting.
● Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
82) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
64
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Item Options Details
Save
Stills
Enable, Disable
You can choose to save
each shot collected
before the movie is
created. Note that when
[Enable] is selected,
[Eect] is not available.
Eect
Choose movie eects,
such as star trails.
Shot Interval
15 sec., 30 sec.,
1 min.
Choose the interval
between each shot.
Frame Rate
, (NTSC)
, (PAL)
Choose the movie frame
rate.
Shooting Time
60 min., 90 min.,
120 min., Unlimited
Choose the length of
the recording session.
To record until the
battery runs out, choose
[Unlimited].
Auto exposure
Lock to 1st shot,
For each shot
Choose whether
exposure is determined
by the rst shot or
adjusted for each shot.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Check the brightness.
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot a single still image.
z Switch to Playback mode (
=
103) and
check image brightness.
z To adjust the brightness, turn the [
] ring
on the shooting screen and change the
exposure level. Check brightness again
by taking another shot.
5
Shoot.
z Press the movie button. Recording
begins, and the indicator on the back of
the camera blinks.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again. Note that cancellation may
take up to about 30 seconds.
z The camera operates in Eco mode
(
=
163) while shooting.
65
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● Sound is not recorded.
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU > [
2] tab > [Night
Display] > [On] (
=
163) before shooting.
● You can also access the screen in step 2 by choosing MENU
(
=
29) > [ 6] tab > [Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting].
● Images saved with [Save
Stills] set to [Enable] are managed
as a single group, and during playback, only the rst image is
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [
]
is displayed in the upper left of the screen. If you erase a grouped
image (
=
115), all images in the group are also erased.
Be careful when erasing images.
● Grouped images can be played back individually (
=
109) and
ungrouped (
=
109).
● Protecting (
=
113) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played
back using Image Search (
=
107). In this case, images are
temporarily ungrouped.
● The following actions are not available for grouped images:
magnifying (
=
111), tagging as favorites (
=
118), editing
(
=
120), printing (
=
177), setting up individual image printing
(
=
182), or adding to a photobook (
=
183). To do these
things, either view grouped images individually (
=
109) or
cancel grouping (
=
109) rst.
● Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
82) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in
steps 1 – 2 of “Specic Scenes” (
=
53), touching [ ] to
access the setting screen, touching [
], and then touching the
same option or [
].
Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate (for a
one-hour session)
Interval between
Shots
Frame Rate
Playback Time
NTSC PAL
15 sec.
16 sec.
15 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
4 sec.
1 min.
4 sec.
1 min.
2 sec.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
● If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that
point is saved.
● A shooting interval of [1 min.] is not available with these eects:
[
], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
66
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Adjusting the Focus
Still Images
Movies
Automatically adjust the focus to suit starry skies.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
z Choose [ ] (
=
62), [ ] (
=
62),
or [ ] (
=
63).
2
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still.
3
Frame the stars to capture.
z Touch [ ], and then touch [Rene
starfocus].
z Tilt the camera so that the stars to
capture are inside the frame displayed.
4
Adjust the focus.
z Press the [ ] button. [Adjusting star
focus] is displayed, and adjustment
begins.
z Adjustment may take up to about
15 seconds. Do not move the camera
until [Adjustment completed] is displayed.
z Press the [
] button.
5
Shoot (=
62, =
63).
● The focus may not be adjusted under the following conditions.
In this case, try again from step 3.
- There is a bright light source
- Airplanes or other light sources or clouds crossed the sky
● If adjustment fails, focus returns to the original position.
Adjusting Colors
Still Images
Movies
Colors can be manually adjusted in [ ] mode.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
z Choose [ ] (
=
60), [ ] (
=
62),
[ ] (
=
62), or [ ] (
=
63).
2
Choose color adjustment.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28).
3
Adjust the setting.
z Turn the [ ] ring to adjust the correction
level for B and A, and then press the [ ]
button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● B represents blue and A, amber.
● Skin tones remain the same when you adjust colors in [
] mode.
● Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the [
]
button when the screen in step 2 is displayed (
=
78).
● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 2.
67
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ]
(to switch it to [
]) and then touching [ ][ ].
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording
Still Images
Movies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3-
stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops.
1
Lock the exposure.
z Touch [ ] to lock the exposure.
z To unlock the exposure, touch [
] again.
2
Adjust the exposure.
z Turn the [ ] ring to adjust the exposure,
as you watch the screen.
3
Shoot (=
67).
Recording Various Movies
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode
Still Images
Movies
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Touch [
], and then choose [ ].
z To conrm your choice, touch [OK].
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
2
Congure the settings to suit the
movie (=
195).
3
Shoot.
z Press the movie button.
z To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(
=
29) > [ 1] tab > [Rec. Mode].
68
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Correcting Severe Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
Counteract severe camera shake, such as when recording while moving.
The portion of images displayed changes more than for [Standard], and
subjects are further enlarged.
z Follow the steps in “Recording Movies
with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting” (
=
51) to choose
[High].
● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [O].
● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
]
(NTSC) or [
] (PAL).
Sound Settings
Still Images
Movies
Deactivating the Wind Filter
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind.
In this case, you can deactivate the wind lter.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Wind
Filter] on the [ 8] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
29).
z Choose [O] (
=
29).
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter
Still Images
Movies
Auto slow shutter can be disabled if movement in movies is rough.
However, under low light, movies may look dark.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto slow shutter] on the [ 8]
tab, and then choose [A-SLOW OFF]
(
=
29).
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [A-SLOW ON].
● Auto slow shutter is only available for [ ] and [ ]
movies.
69
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
3
Shoot (=
67).
z A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
Playback Eects
2x
Playback in fast motion
1x
Playback at normal speed
1/2x
Playback in slow motion
Normal playback with the last two seconds rewound and
played again in slow motion
● Sound is not recorded in these clips.
● The movie quality is [
] (for NTSC) or [ ] (for PAL)
(
=
49) and cannot be changed.
● During [
] recording, a mark indicating the last two seconds is
added to the bar showing the elapsed time.
Recording Time-Lapse Movies (Time-Lapse
Movie)
Still Images
Movies
Time-lapse movies combine images that are shot automatically at a
specied interval. Any gradual changes of the subject (such as changes in
a landscape) are played back in fast motion. You can adjust the shooting
interval and number of shots.
1
Choose [ ].
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Touch [
], and then choose [ ].
z To conrm your choice, touch [OK].
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
Using the Attenuator
Set to [Auto] to reduce audio distortion by automatically activating and
deactivating the attenuator to suit shooting conditions. The attenuator can
also be set to [On] or [O] manually.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Attenuator] on the [ 8] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
29).
z Choose an option as desired (
=
29).
Recording Short Clips
Still Images
Movies
Apply playback eects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,
slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in
Story Highlights albums (
=
128).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Touch [
], and then choose [ ].
z To conrm your choice, touch [OK].
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Specify the shooting time and
playback eect.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Turn the [
] ring to set the shooting time
(4 – 6 sec.).
z After pressing the [
] button, set the
playback eect (
=
69) by turning the
[ ] ring.
70
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● Sound is not recorded.
● Focus remains constant during shooting, after it is determined for
the rst shot.
● The movie quality is [
] and cannot be changed.
● The time-lapse movie frame rate is automatically set to [
]
for NTSC or [
] for PAL and cannot be changed (
=
162).
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
29)
> [
7] tab > [Time-lapse movie settings].
2
Congure movie settings.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Choose an item, choose the desired
option, and press the [
] button.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Shoot.
z To start recording, press the movie
button.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again.
z The camera operates in Eco mode
(
=
163) while shooting.
Item Details
Shooting scene Choose from three types of scenes.
Interval/ Shots
Choose the shooting interval (in seconds) and total
number of shots.
Exposure
Choose whether exposure is determined by the rst
shot or adjusted for each shot.
Review image Display the previous shot for up to 2 seconds.
Time required
Length of the recording session. Varies depending
on the shooting interval and number of shots.
- Scene 1: Up to 1 hour
- Scene 2 or 3: Up to 2 hours
Playback time
Playback time of the movie created from captured
still images.
● Fast-moving subjects may look distorted in movies.
71
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Recording iFrame Movies
Still Images
Movies
Record movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or
devices.
1
Choose [ ].
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Touch [
], and then choose [ ].
z To conrm your choice, touch [OK].
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Shoot (=
67).
● iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.
● The movie quality is [
] (for NTSC) or [ ] (for PAL)
(
=
49) and cannot be changed.
72
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting
style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode
dial set to [ ] mode.
● [
]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes
other than [
], make sure the function is available in that mode
(
=
195).
P Mode
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Customize the settings as desired
(=
73 – =
91), and then shoot.
● If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(
=
74) or activating the ash (if subjects are dark,
=
89),
which may enable optimum exposure.
● Movies can be recorded in [
] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some
menu (
=
28) and MENU
(
=
29) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
73
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1
Lock the exposure.
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then
touch [ ].
z [
] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
z To unlock AE, touch [
] again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
● AE: Auto Exposure
● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
] ring
(Program Shift).
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure
Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of −3 to +3.
z As you watch the screen, turn the [
] ring
to adjust brightness.
● You can also congure this setting by touching the exposure
compensation icon on the bottom of the shooting screen and then
touching or dragging the bar displayed, or by touching [–][+].
Deactivating Exposure Simulation
Images are displayed at a brightness simulating the actual brightness as
captured. For this reason, screen brightness is also adjusted in response
to changes in exposure compensation. This feature can be disabled to
keep the screen at a brightness convenient for shooting, unaected by
exposure compensation.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Expo.
simulation] on the [ 1] tab, and then
choose [Disable] (
=
29).
74
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Movies
Set the ISO speed to [AUTO] for automatic adjustment to suit the shooting
mode and conditions. Otherwise, set a higher ISO speed for higher
sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.
z Touch [
], and then choose the ISO
speed (either touch [ ][ ] or turn the [ ]
ring).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
● The faster shutter speed used at higher ISO speeds reduces
subject and camera shake and increases the ash range.
However, shots may look grainy.
● You can also set the ISO speed by accessing MENU (
=
29) >
[
5] tab > [ISO speed] > [ISO Speed].
Evaluative
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Spot
Metering restricted to within the [
] (Spot AE
Point frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point
frame to the AF frame (
=
74).
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
Still Images
Movies
1
Set the metering method to [ ].
z Follow the steps in “Changing the
Metering Method” (
=
73) to
choose [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Spot
AE Point] on the [ 6] tab, and then
choose [AF Point] (
=
29).
z The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
(
=
85).
● Not available when [AF method] is set to [ +Tracking] (
=
85).
75
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at dierent exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-
stop increments.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [ ] (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
specify a value by touching or dragging
the bar on the setting screen.
● AEB shooting is only available in [ ] mode (
=
89).
● Continuous shooting (
=
42) is not available in this mode.
● If exposure compensation is already in use (
=
73), the value
specied for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function.
● You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing
the [
] button when the exposure compensation screen
(
=
73) is displayed.
● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [
]
(
=
41).
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Still Images
Movies
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specied
in a range of [400] – [12800], and sensitivity can be specied in a range of
three levels.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ISO
speed] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
29).
z Choose [ISO Auto Settings] and press the
[
] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
29).
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO
speed NR)
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially eective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
z Press the [
] button, choose [High
ISO speed NR] on the [ 6] tab, and
then choose the desired option (
=
29).
76
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● This feature may increase noise under some shooting conditions.
● When the eect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and
images become too bright, set it to [Low] or [Disable].
● Images may still be bright or the eect of exposure compensation
may be weak under a setting other than [Disable] if you use a
darker setting for exposure compensation or ash exposure
compensation. For shots at your specied brightness, set this
feature to [Disable].
● To keep the Auto Lighting Optimizer disabled in [ ] and [ ]
mode, touch [
] on the Auto Lighting Optimizer setting screen to
add a [
] mark to [Disable during man expo].
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone
Priority)
Still Images
Movies
Improve gradation in bright image areas to avoid loss of detail in subject
highlights.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Highlight tone priority] on the [ 5] tab,
and then choose [D+] (
=
29).
● With [D+], ISO speed can be set to [AUTO] or in a range of
250 – 6400. Auto Lighting Optimizer is also disabled, in this case.
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings
For optimal brightness in the scenes you shoot, Auto ND lter reduces
light intensity to 1/8 the actual level, by an amount equivalent to three
stops. Choosing [ ] enables you to reduce the shutter speed and
aperture value.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
● When selecting [ ], mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [O] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
51).
● ND: Neutral Density
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
(Auto Lighting Optimizer)
Still Images
Movies
Correct brightness and contrast automatically to avoid images that are too
dark or lack contrast.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Auto
Lighting Optimizer] on the [ 5] tab, and
then choose the desired option (
=
28).
77
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Custom White Balance
Still Images
Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
1
Shoot a white object.
z Aim the camera at a sheet of paper or
other plain white subject, so that white
lls the screen.
z Focus manually and shoot (
=
82).
2
Choose [Custom WB].
z Choose [Custom WB] on the [ 6] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
3
Load the white data.
z Select your image from step 1, press the
[ ] button, and then touch [OK].
z Touch [OK] on the conrmation screen.
z Press the [
] button to close the
menu.
4
Choose [ ].
z Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (
=
77) to
choose [ ].
Image Colors
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the
shooting conditions.
Daylight For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Shade For shooting in the shade.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten
light
For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting.
White
uorescent
light
For shooting under white uorescent lighting.
Flash For shooting with the ash.
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance
(
=
77).
Color
temp.
For manually setting a white balance color
temperature (
=
79).
78
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
Congure advanced settings.
z To congure more advanced settings,
press the [ ] button and adjust the
correction level (either turn the [ ] ring or
touch or drag the frame).
z To reset the correction level, press the
[
] button.
z Press the [
] button to complete the
setting.
● Any correction level you set is retained even if you change the
white balance option in step 1.
● B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
● One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about
5 mireds on a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Color
temperature unit representing color temperature conversion lter
density)
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
29)
> [
6] tab > [WB correction].
● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.
● You can also access the screen in step 2 by touching [
] in
step 1.
● On the screen in step 2, you can touch [
] to restore the
original level and touch [
] to return to the previous screen.
● Shots in step 1 that are too bright or dark may prevent you from
setting the white balance correctly.
● A message is displayed if you specify an image in step 3 that is
not suitable for loading white data. Choose [Cancel] to choose a
dierent image. Choose [OK] to use that image for loading white
data, but note that it may not produce a suitable white balance.
● If [Unselectable image.] is displayed in step 3, choose [OK] to
clear the message and specify another image.
● If [Set WB to “
”] is displayed in step 3, press the [ ] button to
return to the menu screen, and then choose [
].
● Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white
balance.
● The current white balance and related settings are disregarded
when you shoot in step 1.
Manually Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the eect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion lter or color-
compensating lter.
1
Congure the setting.
z Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (
=
77) to
choose [ ].
z Turn the [
] ring to adjust the correction
level for B and A.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
79
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically
to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid,
especially for blue skies, greenery, and sunsets
in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.
Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp.
Suitable for most scenes.
Portrait
For smooth skin tones. The image looks softer.
Suited for close-up portraits. To modify skin
tones, adjust [Color tone] (
=
80).
Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp
and crisp images. Eective for impressive
landscapes.
Fine Detail
For detailed rendering of ne subject contours
and subtle textures. Makes images slightly
more vivid.
Neutral
For retouching later on a computer. Makes
images subdued, with lower contrast and
natural color tones.
Faithful
For retouching later on a computer. Faithfully
reproduces the actual colors of subjects as
measured in daylight with a color temperature
of 5200K. Makes images subdued, with lower
contrast.
Monochrome Creates black and white images.
User Def.
Add a new style based on presets such as
[Portrait] or [Landscape] or a Picture Style le,
and then adjust it as needed (
=
79).
● Default [Auto] settings are used for [ ], [ ], and [ ]
until you add a Picture Style.
● You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (
=
29)
> [
6] tab > [Picture Style].
Manually Setting White Balance Color Temperature
Still Images
Movies
A value can be set representing the white balance color temperature.
z Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (
=
77) to
choose [ ].
z When nished, press the [
] button.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
29)
> [
6] tab > [White balance] > [ ].
● Color temperature can be set at 100 K increments in a range of
2,500 – 10,000 K.
Customizing Colors (Picture Style)
Still Images
Movies
Choose a Picture Style with color settings that express moods or
subjects well. Eight Picture Styles are available, and each can be further
customized.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
80
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Filter eect*
2
Emphasize white clouds in
monochrome images, the green of
trees, or other colors.
N: Normal black-and-white image with
no lter eects.
Ye: The blue sky will look more natural,
and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: The blue sky will look slightly
darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R: The blue sky will look quite dark.
Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G: Skin tones and lips will appear
muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
Toning eect*
2
Choose from the following monochrome
hues: [N:None], [S:Sepia], [B:Blue],
[P:Purple], or [G:Green].
*1 Not available with [ ].
*2 Only available with [
].
● In [Sharpness], [Fineness] and [Threshold] settings are not
applied to movies.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Choose a Picture Style as described
in “Customizing Colors (Picture Style)”
(
=
79).
z Press the [
] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
settings by touching or dragging on the
setting screen.
z To undo any changes, press the [
]
button.
Customizing Picture Styles
Customize these Picture Style settings as needed.
Sharpness
Strength
Adjust the level of edge enhancement.
Choose lower values to soften (blur)
subjects, or higher values to sharpen
them.
Fineness
Indicates the edge thinness that
enhancement applies to. Choose lower
values for more enhanced details.
Threshold
Contrast threshold between edges
and surrounding image areas, which
determines edge enhancement.
Choose lower values to enhance
edges that do not stand out much from
surrounding areas. Note that with lower
values, noise may also be emphasized.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast. Choose lower
values to decrease the contrast, or
higher values to increase it.
Saturation*
1
Adjust the intensity of colors. Choose
lower values to make colors faded, or
higher values to make them deeper.
Color tone*
1
Adjust skin color tone. Choose lower
values to produce redder hues, or
higher values to produce yellower hues.
81
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting Range and Focusing
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ].
For details on the range of focus, see “Lens” (
=
210).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
28).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [
] (
=
41).
z When nished, press the [ ] button.
● [Filter eect] results are more noticeable with higher [Contrast]
values.
Saving Customized Picture Styles
Save presets (such as [ ] or [ ]) that you have customized as new
styles. You can create several Picture Styles with dierent settings for
parameters such as sharpness or contrast.
1
Select a user-dened style number.
z Choose [ ], [ ], or [ ] as
described in “Customizing Colors (Picture
Style)” (
=
79).
z Press the [
] button.
2
Select a style to modify.
z Touch or drag on the setting screen to
choose a Picture Style to modify.
3
Customize the style.
z Touch the setting screen to choose an
item to modify, and then customize it by
touching or dragging the bar.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
● Using the CameraWindow application (
=
175), you can also add
Picture Styles saved on a computer to the camera. For instructions,
refer to the CameraWindow Help.
● You can also choose a Picture Style to modify by touching [ ]
in step 1.
82
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● When you focus manually, the AF method (
=
84) is [1-point
AF] and AF frame size (
=
85) is [Normal], and these settings
cannot be changed.
● Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (
=
39) or
digital tele-converter (
=
84), but the magnied display will not
appear.
● To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
● You can enlarge or hide the magnied display area by adjusting
MENU (
=
29) > [ 4] tab > [MF-Point Zoom] settings.
● To deactivate automatic focus ne-tuning when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ 4] tab >
[Safety MF] > [O].
● You can lock the focus during movie recording by touching [ ].
[
] is then displayed.
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images
Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near
the position you specied. For details on the range of focus, see “Lens”
(
=
210).
1
Choose [ ].
z Touch [ ].
z [
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
2
Specify the general focal position.
z Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
(1, which shows the distance and focal
position) and the magnied display,
touch [ ][ ] to specify the general focal
position, and then press the [ ] button.
z To adjust the magnication, press the
[
] button.
z During magnied display, you can move
the focusing frame by dragging on the
screen.
3
Fine-tune the focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway or touch
[ ] to have the camera ne-tune the
focal position (Safety MF).
z To cancel manual focus, touch [
].
(
1
)
83
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
rst one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specied focus can be set in three levels.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [ ] (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
specify a value by touching or dragging
the bar on the setting screen.
● Focus bracketing is only available in [ ] mode (
=
89).
● Continuous shooting (
=
42) is not available in this mode.
● You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the
[
] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
(
=
82).
● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [
]
(
=
41).
● You can also congure this setting by touching or dragging the
bar on the screen in step 2 to specify a value, touching [
],
and then touching [
].
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[MF Peaking Settings] on the [ 4] tab,
choose [Peaking], and then choose [On]
(
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
29).
● Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
84
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
1-point AF
Still Images
Movies
The camera focuses using a single AF frame. Eective for reliable
focusing. You can also move the frame by touching the screen (
=
88).
● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, rst aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
Digital Tele-Converter
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
29).
z The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following
step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)”
(
=
39).
Choosing the AF Method
Still Images
Movies
Change the auto focus (AF) mode to suit shooting conditions.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (
=
29)
> [
3] tab > [AF method].
85
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● On the screen in step 1, you can also move the AF frame by
touching the screen, restore the AF frame to the original position
by touching [
], or exit the setting by touching [ ].
+Tracking
Still Images
Movies
● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other
detected faces.
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
● When no faces are detected, or when only gray frames are
displayed (without a white frame), pressing the shutter button
halfway will display green frames in the areas in focus. Note that
the maximum number of frames depends on the aspect ratio
(
=
47) setting.
● If no faces are detected in Servo AF (
=
86) mode, the AF
frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the
shutter button halfway.
● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden
● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF)
Still Images
Movies
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
method to [1-point AF].
1
Move the AF frame.
z Touch the screen. An AF frame is
displayed in orange where you touched
(Touch AF).
z To return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, press the [
]
button.
2
Resize the AF frame.
z To reduce the AF frame size, turn the
[ ] ring. Turn it again to restore it to the
original size.
3
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button.
● AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
zoom (
=
39) or digital tele-converter (
=
84), and in manual
focus mode (
=
82).
● You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame
(
=
74).
● You can also congure the AF frame size by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [ 3] tab
(
=
29).
86
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ 3] tab,
and then choose [O] (
=
29).
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press
the shutter button halfway.
O
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not
focus constantly.
Fine-Tuning the Focus
Still Images
Movies
You can ne-tune the focus after autofocusing by turning the control ring.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[AF+MF] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
29).
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ONE
SHOT] in the menu, and then choose
[SERVO].
2
Focus.
z The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed while
you are pressing the shutter button halfway.
● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specied AF method.
● Continuous shooting (
=
42) is slower in Servo AF mode.
● If optimum exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed and
aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
● AF lock shooting is not available.
● Not available when using the self-timer (
=
40).
● Using the self-timer (
=
40) will restrict the AF mode to
[ONE SHOT].
● To have the camera keep adjusting the focus during continuous
shooting (
=
42), specify Servo AF with [AF method] set to
[1-point AF].
● You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (
=
29)
> [
3] tab > [AF operation].
87
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
3
Enter Face Select mode.
z Aim the camera at the person’s face and
press the movie button.
z After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [
] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
z Even if the subject moves, the face frame
[
] follows the subject within a certain
range.
z If a face is not detected, [
] is not
displayed.
4
Choose the face to focus on.
z To switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face, press the movie button.
z Once you cycle through all detected
faces, [Face Select : O] is displayed,
followed by the selected AF method
screen.
5
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
● When [Face ID] is set to [On], only the name of the registered
person chosen as the main subject is displayed, even if other
registered people have been detected. However, their names will
be recorded in the still images (
=
43).
2
Focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway to focus
on the subject, and continue holding the
button halfway down.
3
Fine-tune the focus.
z Turn the [ ] ring. Referring to the
on-screen MF indicator (which shows
the distance and focal position) and the
magnied display, turn the [ ] ring to
adjust the focus.
z To enlarge or reduce the magnied
display, press the [
] button.
z To cancel focusing, release the shutter
button.
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
● Cannot be used with Servo AF (
=
86).
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a specic person’s face to focus on.
1
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(=
84).
2
Assign [ ] to the movie button
(=
98).
88
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● If the camera shoots when you touch the screen, either touch [ ]
and choose [
] (
=
42) or choose MENU (
=
29) > [ 1]
tab > [Touch Shutter] > [Disable].
● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between
subjects and the background.
● Even if you are shooting in [
] mode (
=
81), the camera will
revert to [
] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to
focus.
● If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not be displayed when
registered people are detected, but the names will be recorded in
the still images (
=
43). However, a name will be displayed if
the subject chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected
with Face ID.
Shooting with the AF Lock
Still Images
Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your nger from the shutter button.
1
Lock the focus.
z With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
z The focus is now locked, and [
] and the
MF indicator are displayed.
z To unlock the focus, release the shutter
button and touch [ ].
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
● Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (
=
42).
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus on.
1
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(=
84).
2
Choose a person’s face or another
subject to focus on.
z Touch the subject or person on the
screen.
z When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [
] is displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves.
z To cancel Touch AF, touch [
].
3
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
green [ ].
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
89
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.
● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [O] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
51).
● In [
] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.
O
For shooting without the ash.
● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep
it still.
● You can also congure this setting by touching [ ], touching an
option, and then touching it again.
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the ash range, see “Flash” (
=
211).
1
Raise the ash.
z Move the [ ] switch.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option.
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
● The ash mode cannot be changed by pressing the [ ] button
when the ash is lowered. Move the [
] switch to raise the ash,
then congure the setting.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
90
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting with the FE Lock
Still Images
Movies
Just as with the AE lock (
=
73), you can lock the exposure for ash
shots.
1
Raise the ash and set it to [ ]
(=
89).
2
Lock the ash exposure.
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then
touch [ ].
z The ash res, and when [
] is
displayed, the ash output level is
retained.
z To unlock FE, touch [
] again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
3
Compose the shot and shoot.
● FE: Flash Exposure
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images
Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (
=
73), you can adjust the
ash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
z Raise the ash, press the [
] button, and
choose [ ] in the menu. Turn the [ ] ring
to choose the compensation level, and
then press the [ ] button.
● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for ash shots to
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (
=
29) and
choosing [
5] tab > [Flash settings] > [Safety FE] > [O].
● You can also congure the ash exposure compensation by
accessing MENU (
=
29) and choosing [ 5] tab > [Flash
settings] > [Flash Exp. Comp].
● You can also access the [Flash settings] screen (
=
29) as
follows.
- Press the [
] button when the ash is up, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [
] button.
91
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Other Settings
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
You can keep image stabilization o until the moment you shoot.
z Follow the steps in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (
=
51) to choose
[Shoot Only].
Changing the Flash Timing
Still Images
Movies
Change the timing of the ash and shutter release as follows.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
settings] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
the desired option (
=
29).
1st-curtain The ash res immediately after the shutter opens.
2nd-curtain The ash res immediately before the shutter closes.
92
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and
customize the camera for your shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the
respective mode.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter” (
=
211).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the shutter speed.
z Turn the [ ] ring to set the shutter speed.
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
Available ISO Speed (
=
74)
30 – 1.3 [AUTO], [125] – [3200]
1 – 1/2000 [AUTO], [125] – [12800]
● In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
● When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
[IS Mode] to [O] (
=
51).
● Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (
=
93).
● [ ]: Time value
93
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter”
(
=
211) and “Aperture” (
=
211).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
z Touch [ ] (1), choose the shutter speed
(2), aperture value (3), or [ ] (4), and
then turn the [ ] ring to specify a value.
z When the ISO speed is xed, an
exposure level mark (6) based on
your specied values is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison
to the standard exposure level (5).
The exposure level mark is shown as [ ]
or [ ] when the dierence from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
z The ISO speed is determined and screen
brightness changes when you press the
shutter button halfway after setting the ISO
speed to [AUTO]. If standard exposure
cannot be obtained with your specied
shutter speed and aperture value, the ISO
speed is displayed in orange.
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
Available ISO Speed (
=
74)
[BULB], 30 – 1.3 [AUTO], [125] – [3200]
1 – 1/2000 [AUTO], [125] – [12800]
(
1
)
(
2
) (
3
)
(
5
)
(
6
)
(
4
)
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” (
=
211).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the aperture value.
z Turn the [ ] ring to set the aperture
value.
● Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
● [ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
● In [
] and [ ] modes, press the [ ] button and set
[Safety shift] on the [
6] tab to [On] (
=
29) to have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the
optimum exposure.
However, safety shift is disabled when the ash res.
94
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)
With bulb exposures, shots are exposed for as long as you hold down the
shutter button.
1
Specify bulb exposure.
z Set the shutter speed to [BULB], following
steps 1 – 3 in “Specic Shutter Speeds
and Aperture Values ([ ] Mode)”
(
=
93).
2
Shoot.
z Shots are exposed for as long as you
hold the shutter button all the way down.
The elapsed exposure time is displayed
during exposure.
● Maximum continuous shooting time with this feature is 4 min.
16 sec.
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. In this case, also disable image
stabilization (
=
51).
● To avoid camera shake that may otherwise occur when pressing
the shutter button directly, you can control the camera remotely
from a smartphone (
=
156).
● When [Touch Shutter] is set to [On], shooting is started by
touching the screen once and stopped by touching it again.
Be careful not to move the camera when touching the screen.
● After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
● Screen brightness may change depending on your specied
shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the ash is up and the mode is set to [
].
● Image brightness may be aected by the Auto Lighting Optimizer
(
=
76).
● [ ]: Manual
● Calculation of optimum exposure is based on the specied
metering method (
=
73).
● The following operations are available when ISO speed is set to
[AUTO].
- Adjust exposure by touching [
] a few times to choose the
exposure compensation bar and then turning the [
] ring.
- Touch [
] to lock the ISO speed. Screen brightness changes
accordingly.
95
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, exposure, and ISO
speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, aperture values, and ISO speeds,
see “Shutter” (
=
211), “Aperture” (
=
211), and “Changing the ISO
Speed” (
=
74).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Touch [
], and then choose [ ].
z To conrm your choice, touch [OK].
2
Congure the settings.
z Touch [ ] (1), choose an item to
congure (2), and then turn the [ ] ring to
specify a value.
3
Shoot.
z Press the movie button.
z During recording, you can switch
the setting to congure by touching
[
] repeatedly and adjust the value by
turning the [ ] ring.
● Some shutter speeds may cause ickering on the screen when
recording under uorescent or LED lighting, which may be
recorded.
(
1
)
(
2
)
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images
Movies
Choose from the three ash levels in [ ][ ][ ] modes.
1
Specify the ash mode.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
settings] on the [ 5] tab, and then set
[Flash Mode] to [Manual].
2
Congure the setting.
z Raise the ash, press the [ ] button, and
choose [ ] in the menu. Turn the [ ] ring
to choose the ash output level, and then
press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, the ash
output level is displayed.
[
]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium,
[ ]: Maximum
● You can also set the ash level by accessing MENU (
=
29)
and choosing [
5] tab > [Flash settings] > [Flash Output].
● You can also access the [Flash settings] screen (
=
29) as
follows.
- Press the [
] button when the ash is up, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [
] button.
96
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Customizing Controls and Display
Adjusting Settings while Switching Control
Ring Functions
Still Images
Movies
You can touch the screen to switch the function (ISO speed, exposure
compensation, shutter speed, and aperture value) congured with the
control ring, and quickly adjust the setting by turning the ring.
z Touch [
] to switch to another item, and
then turn the [ ] ring to set a value.
Available setting items vary by shooting mode.
Tv
Av
+/–
ISO
Av
+/–
ISO
Tv
+/–
ISO
+/–
ISO
● +/–: exposure compensation (
=
73); ISO: ISO speed (
=
74);
Tv: shutter speed (
=
92); Av: aperture value (
=
93).
● You can also adjust the exposure when ISO speed is set to
[AUTO] by touching [
] a few times, choosing the exposure
compensation bar, and then turning the [
] ring.
● When the ISO speed is xed, an exposure level mark based on
your specied value is shown on the exposure level indicator for
comparison to the standard exposure level. The exposure level
mark is shown as [
] or [ ] when the dierence from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
● You can check the ISO speed in [AUTO] mode by pressing the
shutter button halfway. If standard exposure cannot be obtained
with your specied shutter speed and aperture value, the ISO
speed is displayed in orange.
● Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ]
(to switch it to [
]) and then touching [ ][ ].
97
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Functions Assignable to the Control Ring
Functions you can assign to the control ring vary depending on shooting
mode.
Item
Shooting Mode
Av Av – –
Tv – Tv –
Adjust the ISO speed (
=
74)
Correct the exposure (
=
73)
Correct white balance (
=
78)
Perform step zooming (
=
40) (except in mode)
Set the Auto Lighting Optimizer eect (
=
76)
Adjust the aspect ratio (
=
47) (except in mode)
● +/–: exposure compensation (
=
73); Tv: shutter speed (
=
92);
Av: aperture value (
=
93).
● The [ ] ring can be used for step zooming (
=
40) in [ ]
or [
] mode.
Changing Control Ring Settings
Still Images
Movies
Reassign control ring functions as follows. Using the control ring is an
enjoyable way to control the camera as you would a fully manual camera.
1
Choose a function to assign to the
[ ] ring.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[ Settings] on the [ 2] tab. Set [Switch
with ] to [Disable].
z Choose [Set Function].
2
Congure the assigned function.
z Touch an option, and then press the [ ]
button.
98
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Customizing the Information Displayed
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Customizing
Display Information” (
=
98) to choose
[Custom display 1] or [Custom display 2],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Touch information to display, to add a [
]
mark.
z To see an example of display, press the
[
] button to return to the [Screen
info/ toggle settings] screen.
● For a smaller grid pattern, access [ 1] tab > [Shooting
information display] > [Grid display].
Assigning Functions to the Movie Button
Still Images
Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the movie
button.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Set button] on the [ 2] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
z Touch an option to assign, and then press
the [ ] button.
Customizing Display Information
Customize what screen is displayed when you press the [ ] button
on the shooting screen. You can also customize what information is
displayed.
1
Access the setting screen.
z On the [ 1] tab, choose [Screen info/
toggle settings] in [Shooting information
display], and then press the [ ] button
(
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
z Touch any screen that you prefer not
to display, to remove the [ ] mark.
Touching it again will add the [ ] mark,
which indicates that it is included in
display.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
● At least one option must be selected.
99
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
2
Choose icons to include in the
menu.
z Touch icons to include in the Quick Set
menu. Selected icons are marked with
a [ ].
z Selected items (labeled with a [
]) will
be included in display.
z Items without a [
] can be congured on
the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
3
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
touch [OK].
● Up to 11 items can be displayed in the menu.
● The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the
[
] button when the Quick Set menu is displayed.
Rearranging Menu Items
1
Access the setting screen.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
Items to Include in the Menu” (
=
99),
press the [ ] button.
z Drag an icon to move it to a new position.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
touch [OK].
● To restore the default setting to the movie button, choose [ ].
● Icons labeled with [
] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
● With [
], you can move and resize the AF frame by pressing the
movie button in [1-point AF] mode (
=
84,
=
85).
● When the [
] function is used, each press of the movie button
adjusts and locks the focus, and [
] is displayed on the screen.
● Pressing the movie button when the [
] function is used
deactivates screen display. To restore the display, do any of the
following.
- Press any button other than the ON/OFF button
- Hold the camera in another orientation
- Raise or lower the ash
● You can still record movies in [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode
even if you assign a function to the movie button.
● You can also congure settings by touching a desired option and
then touching it again or touching [
].
Customizing the Quick Set Menu
Still Images
Movies
The display of Quick Set menu items can be customized.
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Quick
setting menu layout] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button (
=
29).
100
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
3
Save the settings.
z Choose [Register settings] and press the
[ ] button.
z On the conrmation screen displayed
next, touch [OK].
● To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ],
change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting
details are not applied in other shooting modes.
● To reset saved settings to their defaults, choose [Clear settings]
on the screen in step 2, press the [
] button, and then touch
[OK] on the conrmation screen.
● To automatically update your saved settings with any changes
to settings that you make while shooting in [
] mode, set [Auto
update set.] to [Enable] on the screen in step 2.
Saving Shooting Settings
Still Images
Movies
Save commonly used shooting modes and your congured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch
shooting modes or turn the camera o (such as self-timer settings) can be
retained this way.
Settings That Can Be Saved
● Shooting modes ([ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ])
● Items set in [
], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes (
=
73 –
=
93)
● Shooting menu settings
● Zoom positions
● Manual focus positions (
=
82)
● My Menu settings (
=
101)
1
Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
2
Access the screen for assigning
functions.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Custom shooting mode (C)] on the [ 5]
tab, and then press the [ ] button.
101
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
3
Rearrange menu items, as needed.
z Choose [Sort registered items], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Choose a menu item to move, and then
press the [
] button.
z Turn the [
] ring to change the order,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
] button.
● Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specied, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
● You can add up to [ 5] by repeating this process from step 1.
● Choosing [Delete all items on tab] on the screen in step 2 will
delete all items added to the tab.
● On the [Select item to register] screen for saving or clearing
items, you can also touch items to select them.
● On the [Sort registered items] screen, you can also drag items to
change the display order.
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
Still Images
Movies
You can save up to six commonly used shooting menu items on the [ 1]
tab. By customizing the [ 1] tab, you can access these items quickly
from a single screen.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Add
My Menu tab] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
29).
z Touch [OK].
z Choose [Set up MY MENU1] on the [
1]
tab, and then press the [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Select item to register], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Choose up to six menu items to save.
z [
] is displayed.
z To cancel saving, press the [
] button.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
z Press the [
] button.
102
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Deleting All My Menu Tabs or Items
1
Choose an item.
z On the screen in step 1 of “Saving
Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)” (
=
101), choose [Delete all
My Menu tabs] or [Delete all items], and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Delete the item.
z Touch [OK].
z Choosing [Delete all My Menu tabs] will
delete all My Menu tabs and restore the
default [
] tab.
z Choosing [Delete all items] will delete all
items added to tabs [
1] to [ 5].
Customizing My Menu Tab Display
Specify which screen is displayed when the [ ] button is pressed in
Shooting mode.
z On the screen in step 1 of “Saving
Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)” (
=
101), choose [Menu
display], and then choose an item as
desired.
Normal display
Display the most recent menu, as
shown for your previous operation.
Display from My Menu tab
Start display from [
] tab screens.
Display only My Menu tab
Restrict display to [
] tab screens.
Renaming My Menu Tabs
1
Choose [Rename tab].
z Following step 2 in “Saving Commonly
Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu)”
(
=
101), choose [Rename tab] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Change the tab name.
z Use the keyboard displayed to enter the
new tab name (
=
30).
z Press the [
] button, and then
touch [Yes].
Deleting a My Menu Tab
1
Choose [Delete tab].
z Following step 2 in “Saving Commonly
Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu)”
(
=
101), choose [Delete tab] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Delete the item.
z Touch [OK].
103
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [ ]
button to enter Playback mode.
● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
Playback Mode
Viewing
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose images.
z To view the next image, drag right to
left across the screen, and to view the
previous image, drag left to right.
z You can also view the next image by
touching the right edge of the screen (1).
In this case, [
] is displayed. Similarly,
you can view the previous image by
touching the left edge of the screen (2),
and in this case, [
] is displayed.
z To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), quickly drag left or right
repeatedly.
z In this mode, drag left or right to browse
through images.
z Touching the central image will restore
single-image display.
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, quickly drag
up or down.
z Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
104
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
● White lines indicating the aspect ratio are displayed when you
view RAW images. These lines are shown on the top and bottom
of images shot at an aspect ratio of [
] and on the left and right
of images shot at an aspect ratio of [
] or [ ].
● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ 5]
tab > [Scroll Display] > [O].
● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ 5] tab > [Resume] >
[Last shot].
● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(
=
29) and choose your desired eect on the [ 5] tab >
[Transition Eect].
● Touching the volume indicator displays the volume panel. You can
adjust the volume by touching [
][ ].
3
Play movies.
z Touch [ ] to start playback.
4
Adjust the volume.
z Quickly drag up or down to adjust the
volume.
z To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed,
quickly drag up or down across the
screen.
5
Pause playback.
z To pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
z To pause playback, touch the screen.
The movie control panel is displayed.
To resume playback, touch [
].
z After the movie is nished, [
] is
displayed.
(
1
)
105
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in detailed
information display (
=
193).
Brightness Histogram
Still Images
Movies
z Information displays 2 – 5 include a graph
on the top called a brightness histogram,
which shows the distribution of brightness
in images. The horizontal axis represents
the degree of brightness, and the vertical
axis, how much of the image is at each
level of brightness. Viewing the histogram
is a way to check exposure.
RGB Histogram
Still Images
Movies
z Information display 3 includes an RGB
histogram, showing the distribution
of reds, greens, and blues in images.
The horizontal axis represents R, G,
or B brightness, and the vertical axis,
how much of the image is at that level
of brightness. Viewing this histogram
enables you to check image color
characteristics.
● An RGB histogram can also be shown at the top of information
displays 2 – 5. Choose one of the information display options from
2 to 5 in [Playback information display] on tab [
6], press the
[
] button, choose [RGB], and then press the [ ] button.
Note that information display 3 will show a brightness histogram
on the bottom of the screen.
● The brightness histogram can also be accessed while shooting
(
=
98,
=
192).
Switching Display Modes
Press the [ ] button in Playback mode to switch from “no info
display” to “info display 1” (basic info) to “info display 2” (details).
● Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is
connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
Customizing the Shooting Information Displayed
Customize the information shown on each screen. For details on the
information available, see “During Playback” (
=
193).
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Playback information display] on the
[ 6] tab, and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose information to display.
z Choose information to display, and then
press the [ ] button to add a [ ] mark.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
106
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Still Images
Movies
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (
=
105),
the names of up to ve detected people registered in Face ID (
=
43)
will be displayed.
z Press the [
] button several times to
enter simple information display, and then
choose an image by dragging left or right
on the screen.
z Names will be displayed on detected
people.
● If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
Face ID, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ 3] tab > [Face ID Info] >
[Name Display] > [O].
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (
=
35) on a
day of still image shooting as follows.
1
Choose an image.
z Still images shot in [ ] mode are
labeled with [ ] icon.
z Choose a still image labeled with [
].
2
Play the digest movie.
z Touch [ ], and then touch [OK].
z The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
● After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when you are
using the camera with information display deactivated (
=
105).
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
z Press the [
] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [ 2] tab,
and then touch a date (
=
29).
107
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Touch-Screen Operations
z Pinch in to switch from single-image
display to index display.
z To view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
z Drag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
z To view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your ngers apart.
z Touch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images
Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering
image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect
(
=
113) or delete (
=
115) these images all at once.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
118).
Shot Date
Displays the images shot on a specic date.
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Still image/
Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
[
] mode (
=
35).
Name
Displays images of a registered person (
=
43).
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images
you are looking for.
1
Display images in an index.
z Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
z To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [
]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2
Choose an image.
z Drag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
z Touch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
z You can also drag left or right across the
screen to move the orange frame, and
then hold the zoom lever toward [
] to
view an image in single-image display.
● To deactivate the 3D display eect (shown if you drag the screen
up or down quickly), choose MENU (
=
29) > [ 5] tab >
[Index Eect] > [O].
108
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
● To hide or view other information, press the [ ] button in
step 3.
● Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
107), “Magnifying
Images” (
=
111), and “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
112). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (
=
113) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(
=
115), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
181),
or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
183).
● If you edit images and save them as new images (
=
120 –
=
127), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
● After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your
conditions by touching a condition again.
1
Choose the rst condition.
z In single-image display, press the [ ]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, press
the [ ] button again, and choose a
condition.
z When [
] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by touching [ ][ ] or turning the [ ]
ring. To perform an action for all of these
images together, press the [ ] button
and go to step 3.
2
Choose the second condition and
view the ltered images.
z When you have selected [ ] or [ ] as
the rst condition, choose the second by
touching [ ][ ], and then turn the [ ] ring
to view only matching images.
z To switch to ltered image display, press
the [
] button and go to step 3.
z When you have selected [
] as the
rst condition, press the [ ] button and
choose a person on the next screen.
3
View the ltered images.
z Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, drag left or right across the
screen.
z To cancel ltered display, press the [
]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
then press the [ ] button.
109
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Still Images
Movies
Individual still images saved in [ ] mode (
=
63) are grouped, so
that only the rst image is displayed, but you can also view the images
individually.
1
Choose a grouped image.
z Browse images by dragging left or right
until you nd a desired image labeled
[ ].
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28).
3
View images in the group
individually.
z Dragging images left or right will display
only images in the group.
z To cancel group playback, press the [
]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
press the [ ] button again (
=
28).
Using the Control Ring to Jump between
Images
Still Images
Movies
Use the control ring to nd and jump between desired images quickly by
ltering image display according to your specied conditions.
Single image
Jumps by 1 image at a time.
Jump 10 Images
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jump 100 Images
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
Jump Shot Date
Jumps to the rst image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Jump to Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites
(
=
118).
1
Choose a condition.
z Choose a condition (or jump method)
by pressing the [ ] button and
choosing [Image jump w/ ] on the [ 5]
tab.
2
View images matching your
specied condition, or jump by the
specied amount.
z In single-image display, turn the [ ]
ring to view only images matching the
condition or jump by the specied number
of images forward or back.
Touch-Screen Operations
z You can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Control
Ring to Jump between Images” (
=
109)
by dragging left or right with two ngers.
110
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Editing Face ID Information
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Changing Names
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Face ID Info] on the [ 3] tab (
=
29).
z Choose [Edit ID Info] and press the [
]
button.
2
Choose an image.
z Choose an image after dragging left or
right to browse. Press the [ ] button.
z To choose the name you want to
overwrite, touch that person’s face.
3
Choose the editing option.
z Touch [Overwrite].
4
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
z Touch the name of the person to use for
overwriting.
● You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an
image on the screen in step 2, touching [
] to display the
orange frame, and then touching the face to overwrite its name.
● During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images
quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
107) and
magnify them “Magnifying Images” (
=
111). You can apply your
actions to all images in the group at once by choosing [Protect All
Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (
=
113), [All Images
in Group] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (
=
115), or
[Select All in Group] in “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)”
(
=
181) or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
183).
● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still
images, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ 5] tab > [Group Images]
> [O] (
=
29). However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped
during individual playback.
● You can also view group images individually by touching [ ]
on the screen in steps 1 and 2.
111
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Magnify an image.
z Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You can
magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
z The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
z To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [
]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
2
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
z To move the display position, drag across
the screen.
z Press the [
] button to restore
single-image display.
z To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [
] ring.
● You can check the focus when [ ] is displayed by pressing
the [
] button to show the position in focus (Focus Check).
When multiple positions are in focus, press the [
] button
repeatedly to switch to other positions.
(
1
)
Erasing Names
z On the screen displayed in step 3 in
“Changing Names” (
=
110), touch
[Erase].
z After [Erase?] is displayed, touch [OK].
112
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
z Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ 1] tab
(
=
29).
z Touch [Start].
z The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
z Press the [
] button to stop the
slideshow.
● The camera’s power-saving functions (
=
26) are deactivated
during slideshows.
● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
● You can congure slideshow repetition, the display time per
image, and the transition between images on the screen
accessed by touching [Set up] (
=
29).
● You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
● Slideshows can also be started by using Touch Actions (
=
119).
Touch-Screen Operations
z Spread your ngers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
z You can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
z To move the display position, drag across
the screen.
z Pinch in to zoom out.
z Touch [
] to restore single-image
display.
Double-Touch Magnication
z Quickly touch the screen twice to magnify
the image about 3x.
z To return to single-image display from
magnied display, quickly touch the
screen twice.
113
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
113), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Choose an image after dragging left or
right to browse. Once you press the [ ]
button, [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Protect the image.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Touch [OK].
● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera o before nishing the setup process in step 3.
● You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in
step 2, and you can access the conrmation screen by touching
[
].
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (
=
115).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose [ ]. [ ] is
displayed.
z To cancel protection, choose [OFF].
[
] is no longer displayed.
● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (
=
162).
● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Protect] on the [ 1] tab (
=
29).
2
Choose a selection method.
z Choose an option as desired (
=
29).
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
114
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
4
Protect the images.
z Touch [Protect].
● You can also choose images on the screens in steps 2 and 3 by
turning the [
] ring.
● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1
Choose [Protect All Images].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
113), choose [Protect All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Protect the images.
z Touch [OK].
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
113), choose [Select Range]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a starting image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Choose an image after dragging left or
right to browse. Press the [
] button.
3
Choose an ending image.
z Touch an image to activate [Last image],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose an image after dragging left or
right to browse. Press the [
] button.
z Images before the rst image cannot be
selected as the last image.
115
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (
=
113) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [ 1] tab
(
=
29).
2
Choose a selection method.
z Choose the selection method, and then
press the [ ] button.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
z Touch [
] to return to the menu
screen.
Erasing Images
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (
=
113) cannot be erased.
1
Choose an image to erase.
z Drag left or right across the screen to
choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28).
z After [Erase?] is displayed, touch [Erase].
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, touch [Cancel].
● For images captured in both RAW and JPEG format, touching
[
Erase] while the image is displayed gives you the option of
choosing [Erase
], [Erase ], or [Erase ].
● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (
=
119).
116
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
115), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
114) to specify images.
3
Erase the images.
z Touch [Erase].
Specifying All Images at Once
1
Choose [Select All Images].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
115), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
2
Erase the images.
z Touch [OK].
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
115), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Choose an image after dragging left
or right to browse. Once you touch the
screen, [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, touch the screen
again. [
] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Erase the images.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Touch [OK].
● Choosing an image captured in both RAW and JPEG format will
erase both versions.
117
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
2
Rotate the image.
z Drag left or right across the screen to
choose an image.
z The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [
] button.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [ ] to rotate
images or touch [
] to return to the menu screen.
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [O] (
=
29).
● Images cannot be rotated (
=
117) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [O]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
Rotating Images
Still Images
Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28).
2
Rotate the image.
z Each time you drag an option, the image
is rotated 90° in that direction. Press the
[ ] button to complete the setting.
● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [O]
(
=
117).
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Rotate].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [ 1] tab (
=
29).
118
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
3
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Touch [OK].
● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera o before nishing the setup process in
step 3.
● Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when
creating albums (
=
128).
● Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions
(
=
119).
● To specify multiple images at once, move the zoom lever toward
[
] for index display, and then touch images to choose them.
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in ltered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
● “Viewing” (
=
103), “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
112), “Protecting
Images” (
=
113), “Erasing Images” (
=
115), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
181), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(
=
183)
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose [ ]. [ ] is
displayed.
z To untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [OFF], and then press the
[
] button.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Favorites].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [ 1] tab (
=
29).
2
Choose an image.
z Choose an image after dragging left or
right to browse. Once you press the [ ]
button, [ ] is displayed.
z To untag the image, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
119
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
2
Assign a function to a Touch Action.
z Choose a dragging pattern, and then
press the [ ] button.
z Choose a function to assign.
Assignable Functions
Slideshow Start a slideshow.
Erase Erase an image.
Protect Protect an image or cancel protection.
Rotate Rotate an image.
Favorites Tag images as favorites, or untag the image.
Next Favorite
Switch to displaying the next image tagged as
a favorite.
Previous Favorite
Switch to displaying the previous image tagged
as a favorite.
Next Date
Switch to displaying the rst image with the
next shooting date.
Previous Date
Switch to displaying the rst image with the
previous shooting date.
To Camera
Access the Wi-Fi connection screen.
For Wi-Fi details, see “Wireless Features”
(
=
132).
To Smartphone
To Computer
To Printer
To Web Service
Convenient Control: Touch Actions
Still Images
Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to
four touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display.
Using Touch Actions Functions
z Drag across the screen as shown.
z The function assigned to [
] is now
activated.
z Similarly, you can also activate functions
assigned to [
], [ ], and [ ] by
dragging across the screen.
z Customize functions assigned to Touch
Actions as desired.
Changing Touch Actions Functions
Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging
patterns to them as desired.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [ 6]
tab (
=
29).
120
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
3
Review the new image.
z Touch [Processed img.].
z The saved image is now displayed.
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [
].
● RAW images cannot be edited.
● To cancel resizing in step 1, choose [ ].
● Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
● Choosing [Original image] in step 3 will display the original image.
Editing Still Images
● Image editing (
=
120 –
=
123) is only available when the
memory card has sucient free space.
● When [ ] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
[
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
● When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
[
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
Resizing Images
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
1
Choose an image size.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose an image size
(
=
28).
2
Save the new image.
z Touch [OK].
z The image is now saved as a new le.
121
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Cropping
Still Images
Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
28).
2
Resize, move, and adjust the aspect
ratio of the cropping frame.
z To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
z To move the frame, drag on the screen.
z To change the frame orientation,
touch [
].
z To change the frame aspect ratio, touch
[
]. To switch between aspect ratios
([ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ]), press the
[ ] button repeatedly.
3
Preview the cropped image.
z Touch [ ].
z To switch display between the cropped
image and the cropping frame, press the
[
] button repeatedly.
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Touch [ ].
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
120).
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Resize].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Resize] on the [ 3] tab (
=
29).
2
Choose an image.
z Choose an image after dragging left or
right to browse. Press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an image size.
z Choose a size, and then press the [ ]
button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Follow step 2 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
120).
z Press the [
] button and follow
step 3 in “Resizing Images” (
=
120).
122
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Applying Filter Eects
Apply eects equivalent to shooting in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[ ] modes to images and save them as separate images.
1
Choose an eect.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose the eect
(
=
28).
z Press the [
] button.
2
Adjust the eect as needed.
z [ ]: Touch or drag the bar on the bottom
of the screen to adjust contrast.
z [
]: Touch or drag the bar on the bottom
of the screen to adjust defocusing.
z [
] or [ ]: Touch or drag the bar on the
bottom of the screen to adjust the level of
the eect.
z [
]: Touch or drag the bar on the bottom
of the screen to adjust color saturation.
z [
]: Touch or drag the bar on the
bottom of the screen to adjust color tone.
z [
]: Move the zoom lever to resize the
frame. To move it, either touch the screen
or drag the white frame up or down.
3
Save as a new image and review.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
120).
● RAW images cannot be edited.
● Cropped images cannot be cropped again.
● Cropped images cannot be resized (
=
120) or have Creative
lters applied (
=
122).
● Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
● While previewing the cropped image in step 3, you can resize,
move, and adjust the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.
● Operations in step 2 are also possible by pressing the [
]
button, choosing [
3] tab > [Cropping], pressing the [ ]
button, choosing an image, and pressing the [
] button again.
● If you crop still images shot using Face ID (
=
43), only the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
● You can also resize frames by pinching in or out (
=
112) on the
screen.
123
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Touch [New File].
z The image is now saved as a new le.
z Press the [
] button and follow
step 3 in “Resizing Images” (
=
120).
● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
● RAW images cannot be edited this way.
● Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images also captured
in RAW format, but the original image cannot be overwritten.
● The same operations are available by pressing the [ ]
button and choosing [
2] tab > [Creative lters], choosing an
image, and pressing the [
] button.
● [
]: In step 2, you can switch the orientation of the frame to
vertical by pressing the [
] button, and you can move the
frame by dragging it. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [
] button.
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Automatically corrects images aected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate le.
1
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the
[ 3] tab (
=
29).
2
Choose an image.
z Drag left or right across the screen to
choose an image.
3
Correct the image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
z Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(
=
111).
124
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
5
Save the image.
z If you have chosen [ ], choose [ ] and
touch [OK].
z If you have chosen [
], touch [OK].
Brightness
adjustment
Adjust brightness.
White balance Choose a white balance.
Picture Style Choose a Picture Style.
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Set Auto Lighting Optimizer details.
High ISO speed NR Set noise reduction details.
Image quality
Set the image quality level of the resulting
JPEG image.
● For magnied display on the screen in step 3, move the zoom
lever toward [
].
● You can congure advanced settings for functions labeled with
[
] on the screen in step 4 by pressing the [ ] button.
● To compare the current image to the original image before
saving in step 5, press the [
] button and turn the [ ] ring.
To return to the setting screen, press the [
] button.
● Touch [
] before saving in step 5 to restore the original settings.
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
Still Images
Movies
Process images captured in RAW format on the camera. The original
RAW image is retained, and a copy is saved as a JPEG.
1
Choose a RAW image.
z Drag left or right across the screen to
choose a RAW image.
2
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option.
z When choosing [
], go to step 5.
3
Set the processing conditions.
z If you have chosen [ ], after pressing
the [ ] button, choose an option.
4
Congure advanced settings.
z Choose an eect on the bottom of the
screen, and then press the [ ] button to
return to the screen in step 3.
125
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
3
Process the image.
z Follow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
Images with the Camera” (
=
124) to
process the image.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
125), choose [Select Range]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
114) to specify images.
3
Process the image.
z Touch [OK].
z Follow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
Images with the Camera” (
=
124) to
process the image.
● Images produced by in-camera processing will not match those
processed with Digital Photo Professional exactly.
● Up to 500 images can be selected at one time.
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[RAW img processing] on the [ 3] tab
(
=
124).
2
Choose a selection method.
z Choose an option as desired (
=
29).
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
125), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(
=
116), [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
z Press the [
] button to go to the
next screen.
126
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
4
Save the edited movie.
z Touch [ ].
z Touch [New File].
z Touch [Save w/o Comp.].
z The movie is now saved as a new le.
● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
● If the memory card lacks sucient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery
pack.
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of
movies.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing” (
=
103)
and choose [ ].
z The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2
Specify portions to cut.
z (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
z Choose [
] or [ ].
z To view the portions you can cut
(identied by [
] on the screen), drag
[ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie (from
[ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the end of
the movie by choosing [ ].
z If you move [
] to a position other than a
[ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
[ ] mark on the right will be cut.
3
Review the edited movie.
z Touch [ ] to play the edited movie.
z To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
z To cancel editing, press the [
]
button, and then touch [OK].
(
1
)
(
2
)
127
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
Erasing Movie Chapters
Still Images
Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (
=
35) recorded in [ ] mode can be
erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered.
1
Select the clip to erase.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Images (Digest Movies)” (
=
106) to
play a short movie, and then press the
[ ] button to access the movie control
panel.
z Touch [
] or [ ] to choose a chapter.
2
Choose [ ].
z Touch [ ].
z The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3
Conrm erasure.
z Touch [OK].
z The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
Reducing File Sizes
Movie le sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [
], and then choose
[New File].
z Touch [Compress & Sav.].
Image Quality of Compressed Movies
Before Compression After Compression
,
,
● [ ] and [ ] movies cannot be compressed.
● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
● Compressing movies to [
] or [ ] reduces the le
size while maintaining the same image quality.
128
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
1
Choose an image.
z Choose an image in single-image display.
z Themes available in step 3 will vary
depending on image shooting date and
Face ID information.
2
Access the home screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
then press the [ ] button (
=
28).
z After [Busy] is displayed, the home
screen is displayed.
3
Preview an album.
z Choose a person or [Date] or [Event] as
the album theme, and then press the [ ]
button.
z After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, the album is played.
4
Save the album.
z Choose [Save Album as Movie], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Once the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Play the album (=
103).
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an
album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These
images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie
of about 2 – 3 minutes.
Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.
Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a
guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and
ensure at least 1 GB of free space.
Choosing Themes for Albums
Press the [ ] button and choose the Story Highlights icon. The home
screen is displayed, and you can choose the theme for the camera to use
when selecting album elements. Note that the camera is more likely to
add images tagged as favorites (
=
118) to albums.
Date
Creates an album of images shot on the same day.
Images are selected from those shot on the same day as
the image displayed before you access the home screen.
Person’s
name
Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as
albums of children as they grow up.
Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before
shooting may be selected for albums.
Images selected are those that have the same subject
shot during the same month as the image displayed
before you access the home screen.
Event
A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other
events.
Images are selected from those shot during the event
before and after the image displayed before you access
the home screen.
Custom
Includes images based on your specied images, dates,
or people registered in Face ID.
129
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
z The screen at left is displayed when you
use a new or recently formatted memory
card. Touch [OK] and wait until the seven
types of music are registered to the card,
which takes about four minutes.
z When using a memory card with music
already registered to it, go to step 2.
2
Create the album.
z Follow steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
128) to create an
album.
3
Congure background music
settings.
z Choose an item, press the [ ] button,
and choose an option (
=
29).
4
Save the album.
z Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (
=
128) to save albums.
● Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added
later. Background music in albums cannot be removed or
changed.
● Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited
(
=
127).
● If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]
on the screen in step 3.
● To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio
Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.
● To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track],
choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [
]
button.
● Albums can include following images captured by the camera.
- Still images
- Digest movies (
=
35), except compressed movies
- Short movie clips with a playback time of two seconds or more
(
=
69), except compressed movies
● Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the
memory card.
● You can also access the Story Highlights home screen by
choosing MENU (
=
29) > [ 2] tab > [ Story Highlights].
● To jump to the next chapter during the preview, drag left, and to
jump to the previous chapter, drag right.
● You can specify the color eect in step 4 by choosing [Change
Color Eect] and pressing the [
] button. To preview how the
album looks with your selected eect applied, choose [Preview
Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after dragging left or right to
choose a color eect and pressing the [
] button.
● To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story
Highlights home screen, press the [
] button, and touch a listed
album.
Adding Background Music to Albums
Still Images
Movies
Choose from seven kinds of background music to play during album
playback.
1
Register background music to a
memory card.
z Following steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
128), choose
[Music Settings] and press the [ ]
button.
130
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
4
Choose background music.
z When the screen at left is displayed,
choose [Music Settings]. Add background
music as described in “Adding
Background Music to Albums” (
=
129),
and then press the [ ] button.
5
Choose a color eect.
z On the screen in step 4, choose [Change
Color Eect].
z Drag left or right to choose a color eect,
and then press the [
] button.
6
Save the album.
z Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (
=
128) to save albums.
● You can specify up to 40 les (or 10 movie les) after choosing
[Image Selection]. The second time you create a custom album,
[Select images based on previous settings?] is displayed.
To use previously selected images as the basis, choose [Yes].
The previous stills or clips are labeled with [
], and multiple
images are displayed.
● Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].
● The color eect may not be applied to some images.
Creating Your Own Albums
Still Images
Movies
Create your own albums by choosing desired images.
1
Choose to create a Custom album.
z Following steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
128), choose
[Custom] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
z Choose [Image Selection], [Date
Selection], or [Person Selection], and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose album elements.
z Touch elements for your album to label
them with [ ].
z Press the [
] button after you
are nished selecting still images or
short clips in [Image Selection], dates in
[Date Selection], or people in [Person
Selection].
z Choose [Preview] and press the [
]
button.
131
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
P Mode
3
Preview the movie.
z Choose [Preview] and press the [ ]
button.
z After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, a preview of the combined clips
is played.
4
Save the movie.
z Choose [Save] and press the [ ] button.
z Once the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Play the movie.
z Choose [Play Back Movie] on the
screen in step 1 to view a list of movies
you have created.
z Choose the movie to play and press the
[
] button.
● The next time you combine short clips, [Select images based
on previous settings?] is displayed, and you can choose [Yes]
to display the editing screen with clips arranged in the order you
selected them last time.
● To play the selected clip, move the zoom lever toward [
] on the
screen in step 2.
● To rearrange clips, touch [Sort] on the screen in step 2, select a
clip, press the [
] button, drag left or right, and press the [ ]
button again.
● To apply a color eect, choose [Change Color Eect] on the
screen in step 3.
● To add background music, choose [Music Settings] on the screen
in step 3 (
=
129).
● The image quality of movies saved is [
].
● Use a fully charged battery pack, if possible.
Combining Short Clips
Still Images
Movies
Combine short clips to create a longer movie.
Note that movies created this way are not included in Story Highlights
albums (
=
128).
1
Access the editing screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Short
Clip Mix] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [Merge Clips] (
=
29).
2
Specify clips to combine.
z Drag clips on the top of the screen left or
right, choose a clip to combine, and press
the [ ] button.
z Your selected clip is displayed on the
bottom of the screen.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again.
z Repeat these steps to specify other clips
to combine.
z After you are nished selecting clips,
press the [
] button.
132
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety
of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web
services
● Before using wireless features, be sure to read “Precautions for
Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or Others)” (
=
217).
Wireless Features
Available Wireless Features
Using Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot as you view a shooting screen on your
smartphone or tablet. For convenience in this guide, smartphones,
tablets, and other compatible devices are collectively referred to as
“smartphones”.
● Computer
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to
send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera
can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.
Using Bluetooth
®
Features
You can easily pair the camera with a smartphone featuring Bluetooth
low energy technology*. You can also shoot or view images by using your
smartphone as a remote control.
* Hereafter referred to as “Bluetooth”.
133
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Transferring Images to a Bluetooth Enabled
Smartphone
Once you have paired with a smartphone via Bluetooth, simply operate
your smartphone to view and save camera images.
1
Install Camera Connect.
z For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
z For an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
2
Register a nickname.
z Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
camera on.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose [Nickname].
z Press the [
] button to access the
keyboard (
=
30), and then enter a
nickname.
z To return to [Wireless settings] after
pressing the [
] button, press the
[
] button again.
Sending Images to a Smartphone
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send
images.
● Connect via Bluetooth
You can easily connect the camera to a Bluetooth enabled smartphone
by pairing them. This simplies transferring images to a smartphone.
● Connect via NFC (
=
135)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone against the
camera to connect the devices.
● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (
=
137)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
● Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera owners who use CameraWindow
to connect their camera via Wi-Fi to a smartphone should
consider switching to the Camera Connect mobile app.
134
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
7
Transfer images.
z The camera will automatically switch to
Wi-Fi if you choose [Images on camera]
in Camera Connect.
z On an iPhone or iPad, in the device’s
Wi-Fi setting menu, choose the SSID
(network name) displayed on the camera
to establish a connection.
z Use the smartphone to transfer images
from the camera to the smartphone.
z To switch to Bluetooth, disable the Wi-Fi
connection on the smartphone.
● Battery life may be shorter when you use the camera after pairing,
because power is consumed even when the camera is o.
● Before bringing the camera to places where the use of electronic
devices is restricted, set [Bluetooth] to [O], to avoid having the
camera ready for Bluetooth communication even when it is o.
● You can also use the camera to disable Wi-Fi connection
described in step 7.
● To check the information of the smartphone connected via
Bluetooth in [Check/clear connection info], choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth settings].
Choose [Address check] to check the camera’s Bluetooth
address.
● Bluetooth connection status is indicated by one of the following
icons.
[
] Connected, [ ] Disconnected
3
Prepare for pairing.
z Choose [Bluetooth settings] to choose
[Pairing], and then press the [ ] button.
z A screen is displayed indicating that the
camera is waiting to connect.
4
Start Camera Connect.
z Activate Bluetooth on the smartphone,
and then start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
z After the camera is recognized, a camera
selection screen is displayed.
5
Select the camera to connect to.
z Choose the camera nickname.
z Complete the pairing process for the
smartphone.
6
Complete pairing.
z Touch [OK] after the conrmation
message on the camera.
z Press the [
] button when the screen at
left is displayed.
135
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
2
Establish the connection.
z Make sure the camera is o or in
Shooting mode.
z Touch the N-Mark (
) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
z The camera screen automatically
changes.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, touch [OK].
z Camera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
z The devices are connected automatically.
3
Adjust the privacy setting.
z When this screen is displayed, touch
[Yes].
z You can now use the smartphone for
remote live view shooting, or to browse,
transfer, or geotag images on the
camera.
Transferring Images to an NFC-Compatible
Smartphone
Use an Android smartphone’s NFC to simplify the process of installing
Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.
Operation when devices are initially connected via NFC varies depending
on the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
● If the camera is o or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely
while viewing a shooting screen on the smartphone, or geotag your
shots (
=
156). It’s easy to reconnect to recent devices, which are
listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
● If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images from the index display
shown for image selection.
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
to a camera that is o or in Shooting mode.
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is O or in Shooting
Mode
1
Install Camera Connect.
z Refer to the smartphone user manual to
check where the N-Mark ( ) is located.
z Activate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the devices’ N-Marks (
) together
to start Google Play on the smartphone
automatically. Once the Camera Connect
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
136
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (
=
158).
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
151).
● To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ 4] tab
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [NFC] > [O].
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Touch the smartphone with Camera
Connect installed (
=
135) against the
camera’s N-Mark ( ).
z Touching an image to send will label it
with a [
] icon.
z To cancel selection, touch it again. [
] is
no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
z After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button, and then touch [OK].
z Touch [Send].
z The images are now sent.
● If during connection a message on the camera requests you
to enter the nickname, enter it as described in “On-Screen
Keyboard” (
=
30).
● The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
● You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (
=
151).
4
Send an image.
z Drag images left or right to choose an
image to send, and then touch [Send this
image].
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To end the connection, touch [
] in
the upper right of the screen, and then
touch [OK] on the conrmation screen.
You can also use the smartphone to end
the connection.
● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone.
This may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly dierent positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
- If you attempt connection when the camera is o, a message
may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on
the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices
together again.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
158).
137
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
z The camera SSID and password are
displayed.
5
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
z In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
z In the password eld, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
6
Start Camera Connect.
z Start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
7
Select the camera to connect to.
z On the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
8
Adjust the privacy setting.
z Touch [Yes].
z You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
138).
1
Install Camera Connect.
z For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
z For an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, choose [OK].
3
Choose [ ].
z Touch [ ].
4
Choose [Add a Device].
z Touch [Add a Device].
138
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
Simply touch a listed device to connect again. You can register
new devices by dragging left or right to access the device
selection screen.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [O].
● To connect without entering a password in step 5, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Password] > [O]. [Password] is no longer displayed on the SSID
screen (in step 4).
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
151).
● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
=
119), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone through the Wi-Fi menu,
you can also use an existing access point.
1
Prepare for the connection.
z Access the [Waiting to connect] screen
by following steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
137).
9
Send an image.
z Drag images left or right to choose an
image to send, and then touch [Send this
image].
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To end the connection, touch [
] in
the upper right of the screen, and then
touch [OK] on the conrmation screen.
You can also use the smartphone to end
the connection.
z To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedure starting from step 1.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 8. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 8.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
158).
139
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
137).
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
138) from step 4.
2
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
3
Choose [Switch Network].
z Touch [Switch Network].
z A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
4
Connect to an access point.
z For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
142).
z For non-WPS access points, follow
steps 2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed
Access Points” (
=
144) to connect to
the access point.
5
Select the camera to connect to.
z On the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
6
Congure the privacy settings and
send images.
z Follow steps 8 – 9 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
137) to congure the privacy
settings and send images.
140
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
● To uninstall (remove) the software in Windows, select [Start]
menu > [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities], and then choose the
software for uninstallation.
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
On a computer running Windows, congure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
z For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Congure the setting.
z Click in the following order: [Start] menu
> [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities] >
[CameraWindow] > [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
z In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and congure the
setting.
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
For details on computers that you can connect the camera to via Wi-Fi,
system requirements, and other compatibility information (including
support in new operating systems), visit the Canon website.
● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Installing CameraWindow
1
Download the software.
z Visit the following site from a computer
connected to the Internet.
http://www.canon.com/icpd/
z Choose your country or region, and
then follow the instructions displayed to
prepare for downloading.
2
Follow the instructions displayed.
z Double-click the downloaded le to
install it.
141
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission.
Check which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission.
Also called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
● If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (
=
29)
> [
4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Check MAC
Address].
● The following Windows settings are congured when you run the
utility in step 2.
- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (nd) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (nd) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
● Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Interface” (
=
213).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,
=
142) or not (
=
144).
For non-WPS access points, check the following information.
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
142
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
5
Choose [WPS Connection].
z Touch [WPS Connection].
6
Choose [PBC Method].
z Touch [PBC Method].
7
Establish the connection.
z On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
z Touch [Next].
z The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
8
Choose the target device.
z Touch the name of the target device,
and then press the [ ] button.
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
z For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, touch [OK].
3
Choose [ ].
z Touch [ ].
4
Choose [Add a Device].
z Touch [Add a Device].
143
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
11
Import images.
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
z Use Digital Photo Professional to view
images you save to a computer. To view
movies, use preinstalled or commonly
available software compatible with
movies recorded by the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
Simply touch a listed device to connect again. You can register
new devices by dragging left or right to access the device
selection screen.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [O].
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (
=
158).
● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
● To disconnect from the camera, turn o the camera.
● If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
=
119), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
9
Install a driver (rst Windows
connection only).
z When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
z Double-click the connected camera icon.
z Driver installation will begin.
z After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
10
Display CameraWindow.
z Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
144
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
● If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]
in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2
to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen
instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password
(
=
141).
● When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, touch [Next].
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
142).
● To connect to a device via an access point, conrm that the target
device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the
procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
142).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
142)
from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
144) from step 2.
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1
View the listed access points.
z View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
142).
2
Choose an access point.
z Touch a network (access point) to
choose it.
3
Enter the access point password.
z Touch the text box (in the area outlined,
in this example) to access the keyboard,
and then enter the password (
=
30).
z Touch [Next].
4
Choose [Auto].
z Touch [Auto].
z To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
142).
145
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. Note that
you will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone to receive a notication message for completing linkage
settings.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, touch [OK].
2
Choose [ ].
z Touch [ ].
3
Accept the agreement to enter an
email address.
z Read the agreement displayed and touch
[I Agree].
Sending Images to a Registered Web
Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
● For information on countries and regions where CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website
(http://www.canon.com/cig/).
● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details,
check the websites for each Web service you want to register.
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
● CANON iMAGE GATEWAY also provides user guides for
downloading.
146
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
8
Access the page in the notication
message and complete camera link
settings.
z From a computer or smartphone,
access the page linked in the notication
message.
z Follow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera link settings page.
9
Complete CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
settings on the camera.
z Touch [ ].
z [
] (
=
153) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations.
z You can add other Web services,
as needed. In this case, follow the
instructions from step 2 in “Registering
Other Web Services” (
=
147).
● Make sure initially that your computer or smartphone mail
application is not congured to block email from relevant domains,
which may prevent you from receiving the notication message.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 1 (
=
158).
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu.
Drag left or right to access the device selection screen and then
congure the setting.
● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
=
119), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
4
Establish a connection with an
access point.
z Connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
142) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
144).
5
Enter your email address.
z Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, a
screen is displayed for entering an email
address.
z Enter your email address and touch
[Next].
6
Enter a four-digit number.
z Enter a four-digit number of your choice
and touch [Next].
z You will need this four-digit number later
when setting up linkage with CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.
7
Check for the notication message.
z Once information has been sent to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you will
receive a notication message at the
email address entered in step 5.
z Touch [OK] on the next screen, which
indicates that notication has been sent.
z [
] now changes to [ ].
147
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose the destination.
z Touch the icon of the Web service to
connect to.
z If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, touch the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen displayed, and then press the [
]
button.
3
Send an image.
z Drag images left or right to choose an
image to send, and then touch [Send this
image].
z When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, and touch [I Agree].
z After the image is sent, touch [OK] on the
screen displayed to return to the playback
screen.
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera.
1
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera link settings
page.
z From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
2
Congure the Web service you want
to use.
z Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
3
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button.
z Drag left or right on the screen, and then
touch [
].
z The Web service settings are now
updated.
● If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
148
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
138).
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
z Touch [ ].
3
Choose [Add a Device].
z Touch [Add a Device].
z The camera SSID and password are
displayed.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (
=
151).
● To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a
smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for
iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from
Google Play.
149
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by choosing the device. To add
a new device, drag left or right to access the device selection
screen, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [O].
● To connect without entering a password in step 4, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Password] > [O]. [Password] is no longer displayed on the SSID
screen (in step 3).
● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (
=
138).
● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
=
119), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
4
Connect the printer to the network.
z In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
z In the password eld, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
5
Choose the printer.
z Touch the name of the printer.
6
Choose an image.
z Drag left or right across the screen to
choose an image.
7
Access the printing screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ],
and press the [ ] button again.
8
Print the image.
z For detailed printing instructions,
see “Printing Images” (
=
177).
z To end the connection, press the
[
] button and touch [OK] on the
disconnection conrmation screen.
150
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
4
Send an image.
z Drag images left or right to choose an
image to send, and then touch [Send this
image].
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To end the connection, touch [
] in
the upper right of the screen, and then
touch [OK] on the conrmation screen.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by choosing the device. To add
a new device, drag left or right to access the device selection
screen, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [O].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
151).
● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
=
119), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
● Only Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras can be connected via Wi-Fi.
You cannot connect to a Canon camera unless it is Wi-Fi compatible,
even if it supports FlashAir/Eye-Fi cards.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
z Touch [ ].
3
Choose [Add a Device].
z Touch [Add a Device].
z Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
z Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
151
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
2
Choose an image.
z Touching an image to send will label it
with a [ ] icon.
z To cancel selection, touch it again. [
] is
no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
z After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
z Touch [OK].
3
Send the images.
z Touch [Send].
● You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom
lever twice toward [
] to access single-image display and then
touching images.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
151), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also
enable you to annotate the images you send.
Sending Multiple Images
1
Choose [Select and send].
z On the image transfer screen, touch
[Select and send].
2
Choose a selection method.
z Touch a selection method, and then press
the [ ] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
151), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
152
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Notes on Sending Images
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
● For movies that you do not compress (
=
127), a separate,
compressed le is sent instead of the original le. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the le cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
2
Choose images.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
114) to specify images.
z To include movies, touch [
] to add a
[ ] next to [Incl. Movies].
z Touch [OK].
3
Send the images.
z Touch [Send].
Sending Favorite Images
Send only images tagged as favorites (
=
118).
1
Choose [Favorite Images].
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
151), choose [Favorite
Images] and press the [ ] button.
z An image selection screen for favorites is
displayed. If you prefer not to include an
image, touch the image to remove [
].
z After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
z Touch [OK].
2
Send the images.
z Touch [Send].
● In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have
tagged images as favorites.
153
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination.
On the destination computer, you will install and congure Image Transfer
Utility, free software compatible with Image Sync.
1
Add [ ] as a destination.
z Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(
=
145).
z To include a Web service as the
destination, log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (
=
145), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings
screen, and choose the destination
Web service in Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Help.
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
On the image transfer screen, you can choose the recording pixel setting
(size) of images to send by touching [ ].
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
● Choosing [
] will resize images that are larger than the selected size
before sending.
● Movies cannot be resized.
● Image size can also be congured in MENU (
=
29) > [ 4] tab
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Resize for Sending].
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may dier depending on the
Web service.
1
Access the screen for adding
comments.
z On the image transfer screen, touch [ ].
2
Add a comment (=
30).
3
Send the image.
● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
154
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
2
Register the camera.
z Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
z Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [
],
and then click [Add new camera].
z A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
z Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images,
the icon changes to [
].
2
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose [Wi-Fi Settings] (
=
29).
z Choose [Image Sync], press the [
]
button, and then choose [Stills/Movies].
Preparing the Computer
Install and congure the software on the destination computer.
1
Install Image Transfer Utility.
z Install Image Transfer Utility on a
computer connected to the Internet
by following steps 1 – 2 of “Installing
CameraWindow” (
=
140).
z Image Transfer Utility can also be
downloaded from the Image Sync
settings page of CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (
=
153).
155
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone
By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can
use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync
while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
server.
In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.
● Make sure you have completed the settings described in “Preparing
the Computer” (
=
154).
● Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones
or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.
● Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (
=
145), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing
and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
● Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be
viewed.
● Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and
downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.
● For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon
Online Photo Album Help.
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned o, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
1
Send images.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading
Images to Web Services” (
=
147) and
choose [ ].
z Sent images are labeled with a [
] icon.
2
Save the images to the computer.
z Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
z Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is o.
● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
pack.
● Even if images were imported to the computer through a dierent
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY,
so the computer must be connected to the Internet.
156
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Controlling the Camera Remotely from a
Smartphone
Controlling the Camera via Wi-Fi
You can shoot as you view a shooting screen on your smartphone.
● Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow viewing
of all images from the smartphone (
=
137).
1
Secure the camera.
z Keep the camera still by mounting it on a
tripod or taking other measures.
2
Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
137).
z In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
3
Choose remote live view shooting.
z In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose [Remote live view shooting].
z Once the camera is ready for remote
live view shooting, a live image from the
camera is displayed on the smartphone.
z At this time, a message is displayed
on the camera, and all operations
except pressing the ON/OFF button are
disabled.
4
Shoot.
z Use the smartphone to shoot.
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
● Geotag images on the camera (
=
156)
● Control the camera remotely from a smartphone (
=
156)
● Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow image
viewing on the smartphone (
=
137,
=
158).
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera
Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
● Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
20). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (
=
165)
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
157
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
3
Choose Bluetooth remote controller.
z In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose [Bluetooth remote controller].
z The smartphone screen changes to a
screen for remote control via Bluetooth.
4
Shoot and switch images.
z Use the smartphone to shoot in Shooting
mode and switch images in Playback
mode.
● [Bluetooth remote controller] is not available when connected via
Wi-Fi.
● You can check the Bluetooth connection status by referring to the
icon on the screen (
=
133).
● Movie shooting is not available.
● Focusing may take longer.
● Image display or shutter release may be delayed, depending on
the connection status.
● Any rough subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not aect recorded images.
● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and transfer images from the camera.
Controlling the Camera via Bluetooth
You can use a Bluetooth enabled smartphone for remote shooting and
switching of image display. This is convenient if you want to connect
quickly while shooting, or if you will control playback while connected to
a TV.
1
Prepare the camera.
z Set the shooting mode and the shooting
functions on the camera.
z Keep the camera still by mounting it on
a tripod or taking other measures when
shooting.
2
Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
133).
z Make sure that the Bluetooth connection
has been established.
158
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
4
Choose the item to edit.
z Touch the item you want to edit.
z The items you can change depend on the
device or service.
Congurable Items
Connection
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname]
(
=
158)
O O O O
–
[View Settings] (
=
159)
–
O
– – –
[Erase Connection Info] (
=
158)
O O O O
–
O
: Congurable
–
: Not congurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
z Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
158), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
] button and a keyboard will
be displayed. Enter the new nickname
(
=
30).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
z Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
158), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, touch [OK].
z The connection information will be
erased.
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Drag left or right to access the device
selection screen, and then touch the icon
of a device to edit.
2
Choose [Edit a Device].
z Touch [Edit a Device], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Choose the device to edit.
z Touch the device to edit, and then press
the [ ] button.
159
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Changing the Camera Nickname
Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as
desired.
1
Choose [Wireless settings].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
(
=
29).
2
Choose [Nickname].
z Choose [Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
3
Change the nickname.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard (
=
30), and then enter a
nickname.
● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [
] button and enter a dierent
nickname.
● You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]
screen displayed when you rst use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the
text box, press the [
] button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
Specifying Images Viewable from Smartphones
Specify whether all images on the camera’s memory card can be viewed
from smartphones connected to the camera.
z Choose [View Settings] in step 4
of “Editing Connection Information”
(
=
158) and choose the desired option.
● For remote live view shooting, choose [On].
160
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Clearing Information of Devices Paired via
Bluetooth
Before pairing with a dierent smartphone, clear the information about any
connected smartphones.
1
Choose [Bluetooth settings].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth
settings].
2
Choose [Check/clear connection
info].
z Choose [Check/clear connection info],
and then press the [ ] button.
3
Clear the information.
z On the [Check/clear connection info]
screen, press the [ ] button.
z When [Clear information about devices
you have connected to] is displayed,
touch [OK].
4
Clear the camera information.
z In the Bluetooth setting menu on the
smartphone, clear the camera information
registered on the smartphone.
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings.
Be sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
1
Choose [Wireless settings].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
(
=
29).
2
Choose [Reset Settings].
z Choose [Reset Settings], and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Restore the default settings.
z Touch [OK].
z The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
● To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
[Reset camera] on the [
5] tab (
=
169).
161
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
greater convenience
Setting Menu
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
MENU (
=
29) settings on the [ 1], [ 2], [ 3], [ 4], and [ 5] tabs
can be congured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for
greater convenience.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
z Choose [Create Folder] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose [Daily].
z Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns le numbers.
z Choose [File Numbering] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose an option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the
9999th shot is taken/saved) even if you switch
memory cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
162
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (
=
162), press the
[ ] button to choose [Low Level
Format]. A [ ] icon is displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
162) to continue with the
formatting process.
● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
162), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
Changing the Video System
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the image quality (frame rate) available for movies.
z Choose [Video system] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose an option.
● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted,
=
162) memory card.
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
z Choose [Format] on the [ 1] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [OK].
z Touch [OK].
3
Format the memory card.
z On the conrmation screen displayed
next, touch [OK] to start formatting.
z When formatting is nished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Touch [OK].
● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
163
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Switching the Color of Screen Information
Still Images
Movies
Information displayed on the screen and menus can be changed to a color
suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting is
useful in modes such as [ ] (
=
60).
z Choose [Night Display] on the [
2] tab,
and then choose [On] (
=
29).
z To restore the original display, choose
[O].
● You can also return the setting to [O] by holding down the
[
] button for at least one second.
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Eco Mode] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose [On].
z [
] is now shown on the shooting
screen (
=
192).
z The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns o.
The camera turns o after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineective in helping you level the
camera.
For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (
=
98) to help you
level the camera in advance.
1
Make sure the camera is level.
z Place the camera on a at surface, such
as a table.
2
Calibrate the electronic level.
z Choose [Electronic level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Calibrate] and press the
[
] button. A conrmation message is
displayed.
z Touch [OK].
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
z Choose [Electronic level] on the [
1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Reset], and then press the [
]
button.
z Touch [OK].
164
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Screen Brightness
z Choose [Disp. Brightness] on the [ 2]
tab, and then press the [ ] button.
z Touch [
][ ] to adjust the brightness.
● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button
for at least one second. (This will override the [Disp. Brightness]
setting on the [
2] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press
and hold the [
] button again for at least one second or
restart the camera.
2
Shoot.
z To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is o but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Power Down and Display O, respectively) as needed (
=
26).
z Choose [Power Saving] on the [
2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose an item, and then choose an
option.
● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display O].
● The [Display O] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [O].
● These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (
=
163) to [On].
165
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (
=
21) will
automatically update your [
Home] time and date.
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
z Choose [Date/Time] on the [
2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Touch the option to congure, and then
touch [
][ ] to specify the date and
time.
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [ ] button in Shooting mode (
=
25). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
z Choose [Lens Retraction] on the [
2] tab,
and then choose [0 sec.].
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
1
Specify your home time zone.
z Choose [Time Zone] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z When conguring this setting for the rst
time, make sure [
Home] is selected,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Touch [
][ ] to choose the home time
zone.
To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), touch [ ].
z Press the [
] button.
2
Specify your destination.
z Touch [ World], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Touch [
][ ] to choose the destination
time zone.
z If necessary, specify daylight saving time
as in step 1.
z Press the [
] button.
3
Switch to the destination time zone.
z Make sure [ World] is selected, and
then press the [ ] button.
z [
] is now shown on [Time Zone] and
shooting screens (
=
192).
166
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
z Choose [Volume] on the [
3] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Choose an item, and then adjust the
volume by touching the desired position
on the bar.
Customizing Sounds
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
z Choose [Sound Options] on the [
3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose an item, and then press the [
]
button.
z Choose an option.
● The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [ ] mode
(
=
35) cannot be changed.
Start-Up Screen
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as
follows.
z Choose [Start-up Image] on the [
1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose an option.
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
z Choose [Language
] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose a language, and then press the
[
] button.
● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [
] button and immediately pressing
the [
] button.
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
z Choose [Mute] on the [
3] tab, and then
choose [On].
● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ]
button as you turn the camera on.
● Sound is not played during movies (
=
103) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, drag up across the
screen. Adjust volume by dragging up or down, as needed.
167
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Automatically Locking the Touch-Screen Panel
To prevent unintended operations, you can set up automatic locking of the
touch-screen panel.
z Choose [Screen auto-lock settings] on
the [
4] tab, and then press the [ ]
button.
z Choose [Screen auto lock], and then
choose [Enable].
z Choose [Auto-locks after], and then
choose an option.
z To unlock the touch-screen panel, press
the shutter button halfway.
● The touch-screen panel can also be unlocked by pressing or
turning controls, such as the [
] button or [ ] ring.
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (
=
33), the
MF indicator (
=
82), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
z Choose [Units] on the [
4] tab, and then
choose [ft/in].
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose Quick Set menu
(
=
28) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
z Choose [Hints & Tips] on the [
3] tab,
and then choose [O].
Listing Shooting Modes by Icon
List shooting modes on the selection screen by icon only, without mode
names, for faster selection.
z Choose [Mode icon size/info] on the [
3]
tab, and then choose [Small, no info].
Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity
Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased, so that the camera
responds to a lighter touch.
z Choose [Touch Operation] on the [
4]
tab, and then choose [Sensitive].
168
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
z Follow the steps in “Setting Copyright
Information to Record in Images”
(
=
168) and choose [Delete Copyright
Info].
z Touch [OK].
● The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted.
● [
4] tab setting [Wireless settings] (
=
132)
● [
5] tab setting [Custom shooting mode (C)] (
=
100)
Checking Certication Logos
Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide,
on the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
z Choose [Certication Logo Display] on
the [
5] tab, and then press the [ ]
button.
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
z Choose [Copyright Info] on the [
5] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Enter Author’s Name] or [Enter
Copyright Details], press the [
] button
to access the keyboard, and then enter
the name (
=
30).
z Press the [
] button. When [Accept
changes?] is displayed, touch [Yes].
z The information set here will now be
recorded in images.
● To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [
] button.
169
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Restoring Defaults for Individual Functions
Settings for the following functions can be restored to defaults individually.
● User settings for custom shooting modes
● Copyright information
● Calibrated value for the electronic level
● Face ID information
● Wireless settings
1
Access the [Other settings] screen.
z Choose [Reset camera] on the [ 5] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Other settings] and press the
[
] button.
2
Choose the function to reset.
z Choose the function to reset, and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Restore default settings.
z Touch [OK].
z Default function settings are now
restored.
Restoring Default Camera Settings
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
Restoring All Camera Defaults
1
Access the [Basic settings] screen.
z Choose [Reset camera] on the [ 5] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Basic settings] and press the
[
] button.
2
Restore default settings.
z Touch [OK].
z All camera defaults are now restored.
● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- [
1] tab setting [Video system] (
=
162)
- [
2] tab settings [Time Zone] (
=
165) and [Date/Time]
(
=
165)
- [
3] tab setting [Language ] (
=
166)
- Shooting mode (
=
53)
- Wireless settings (
=
132)
- Calibrated value for the electronic level (
=
163)
- Copyright information (
=
168)
- Face ID information
170
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
separately
Accessories
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or
accidents such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine
Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack).
Please note that any repairs your Canon product may require as a result
of such malfunction are not covered under warranty and will incur a fee.
System Map
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-600PCU).
*3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
Wrist Strap
Battery Pack
NB-13L*
1
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*
1
USB Cable (camera end: Micro-B)*
2
Memory Card Card Reader Computer
TV/Video System
Included Accessories
Power
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
High-Power Flash
HF-DC2
Compact Power
Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Flash Unit
Connect Station CS100
Cables
HDMI Cable
(camera end: Type D)*
3
171
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/
CA-DC30E
z Insert the included battery pack into the
camera for charging. Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU (sold separately) is required
to connect the adapter to the camera.
● The battery charger and compact power adapter can be used in
areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
● For power outlets in a dierent format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Flash Unit
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
z External ash for illuminating subjects
that are out of range of the built-in ash.
High-Power Flash HF-DC1 can also be
used.
● High-Power Flash units cannot be used in [ ], [ ], or [ ]
shooting mode when [Flash Mode] is set to [Manual].
Other Accessories
Interface Cable IFC-600PCU
z For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-13L
z Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
z Charger for Battery Pack NB-13L
● The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or re, that occur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that
is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
172
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Using Optional Accessories
Still Images
Movies
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2 ft.,
with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image
quality of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or
[ ] can be viewed in high denition.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are
o.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
z On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
z On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Printers
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
z Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Photo and Movie Storage
Connect Station CS100
● A media hub for storing camera images,
viewing on a connected TV, printing
wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,
sharing over the Internet, and more.
173
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Inserting and Charging the Battery Pack
Charge the battery pack by using the supplied battery pack with an
optional Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E and Interface
Cable IFC-600PCU.
1
Insert the battery pack.
z Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (
=
19)
to open the cover.
z Insert the battery pack as described in
step 2 of “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Your Memory Card” (
=
19).
z Follow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (
=
19)
to close the cover.
2
Connect the compact power adapter
to the camera.
z With the camera turned o, open the
cover (1). Hold the smaller plug of the
interface cable (sold separately) facing
as shown and insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal (2).
z Insert the larger plug of the interface
cable into the compact power adapter.
(
1
)
(
2
)
3
Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
z Switch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
4
Turn the camera on.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
z When nished, turn o the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
193).
● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
174
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Power” (
=
212).
● You can view images even while the battery is charging, by
turning the camera on and entering Playback mode (
=
23).
However, you cannot shoot while the battery is charging.
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a dierent format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery
You can also charge the battery pack by inserting the larger plug of the
interface cable into a computer’s USB terminal in step 2 of “Inserting and
Charging the Battery Pack” (
=
173). For details about USB connections
on the computer, refer to the computer user manual.
We recommend using Interface Cable IFC-600PCU (sold separately).
z With the camera turned o, open the
cover. With the smaller plug of the cable
in the orientation shown, insert the plug
fully into the camera terminal.
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
computer. For details on computer
connections, refer to the computer user
manual.
3
Charge the battery pack.
z CA-DC30: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the charger into a power outlet (2).
z CA-DC30E: Plug the power cord into the
compact power adapter, then plug the
other end into a power outlet.
z Charging begins and the USB charge
lamp lights up.
z The lamp turns o when charging
nishes.
z Remove the compact power adapter from
the power outlet and the interface cable
from the camera.
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● When charging another battery pack, always disconnect the
interface cable from the camera before replacing the battery pack
for charging.
175
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Using the Software
To utilize the features of the following software, download the software
from the Canon website and install it on your computer.
● CameraWindow
- Import images to your computer
- Add Picture Styles saved on your computer to the camera
● Image Transfer Utility
- Set up Image Sync (
=
153) and receive images
● Map Utility
- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images
● Digital Photo Professional
- Browse, process and edit RAW images
● Picture Style Editor
- Edit Picture Styles and create and save Picture Style les
● To view and edit movies on a computer, use preinstalled or
commonly available software compatible with movies recorded by
the camera.
● Image Transfer Utility can also be downloaded from the Image
Sync settings page of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
z Charging now begins, and the indicator
on the back of the camera blinks in
green. Charging will be nished in about
four hours.
z However, charging may take longer if
you import images on the camera to
the computer, as described in “Saving
Images to a Computer” (
=
176).
z The indicator continues to blink in green
even after charging is nished, as long as
the camera is connected to the computer.
● Charging stops and the indicator goes o if, after you begin
charging as described above, you press the ON/OFF button to
turn the camera o.
● With some computers, battery charging may require the memory
card to be in the camera. Insert the memory card in the camera
(
=
19) before connecting the cable to the computer’s USB port.
176
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
computer. For details on computer
connections, refer to the computer user
manual.
z Once you have connected the camera
to the computer, the camera turns on
automatically.
2
Access CameraWindow.
z Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
z Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
z In the screen that is displayed, click the
change program link of [
].
z Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
z Double-click [
].
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
For detailed software system requirements and compatibility information
(including support in new operating systems), visit the Canon website.
Installing the Software
Install the software as described in steps 1 – 2 of “Installing
CameraWindow” (
=
140).
● To uninstall (remove) the software in Mac OS, in the [Canon
Utilities] folder within the [Applications] folder, drag the folder of
the software for uninstallation to the Trash, and then empty the
Trash.
Saving Images to a Computer
Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B), you can
connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.
1
Connect the camera to the
computer.
z With the camera turned o, open the
cover. With the smaller plug of the cable
in the orientation shown, insert the plug
fully into the camera terminal.
177
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Print your shots and congure a variety of settings used for your printer
or photo printing services by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-
compatible printer with a cable.
A Canon SELPHY CP printer is used in this example of PictBridge
printing. Also refer to your printer user manual.
Easy Print
Still Images
Movies
Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B).
1
Make sure the camera and printer
are o.
2
Connect the camera to the printer.
z Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details,
refer to the printer manual.
3
Save the images to the computer.
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
] button to
turn the camera o, and unplug the cable.
z To view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version,
the software in use, or image le sizes.
178
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
z Follow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
(
=
177) to access this screen.
2
Congure the settings.
z Touch an item, and on the next screen,
choose an option. Press the [ ] button to
return to the printing screen.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Prints images with the le number added.
Both
Prints images with both the date and le
number added.
O
–
Default Matches current printer settings.
O
–
On
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
Red-
Eye 1
Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Copies
Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print
(
=
179).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other
details (
=
179).
3
Turn the printer on.
4
Choose an image.
z Drag left or right across the screen to
choose an image.
5
Access the printing screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ],
and press the [ ] button again.
6
Print the image.
z Choose [Print] and press the [ ] button.
z Printing now begins.
z To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 4 after
printing is nished.
z When you are nished printing, turn the
camera and printer o and disconnect
the cable.
● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (
=
172).
179
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Paper Settings].
z After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
178) to access the printing
screen, touch [Paper Settings].
2
Choose a paper size.
z Choose an option, and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Choose a type of paper.
z Choose an option, and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Choose a layout.
z Choose an option, and then press the
[
] button.
z When choosing [N-up], specify the
number of images per sheet.
z Press the [
] button.
5
Print the image.
z Follow step 6 in “Easy Print” (
=
177)
to print.
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
z After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
178) to access the printing
screen, touch [Cropping].
z A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
z To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
z To move the frame, drag it.
z To rotate the frame, press the [
]
button.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Print the image.
z Follow step 6 in “Easy Print” (
=
177)
to print.
● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
180
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
4
Print the image.
z Follow step 6 in “Easy Print” (
=
177)
to print.
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
z Follow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
(
=
177) to choose a movie. The screen
at left is displayed.
2
Choose a printing method.
z Choose [ ] and press the [ ] button.
On the next screen, choose an option,
and then press the [ ] button to return to
the printing screen.
3
Print the image.
z Follow step 6 in “Easy Print” (
=
177)
to print.
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a
single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number,
le number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting
[Caption] to [On].
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identication purposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of
L and an aspect ratio of 3:2.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [ID Photo].
z Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(
=
179), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose the long and short side
length.
z Choose an item and press the [ ]
button. On the next screen, choose the
length, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the printing area.
z Choose [Cropping] and press the [ ]
button.
z Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (
=
179) to choose the printing
area.
181
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both
Both standard and index formats are
printed.
Date
On Images are printed with the shooting date.
O
–
File No.
On Images are printed with the le number.
O
–
Clear
DPOF data
On
All image print list settings are cleared
after printing.
O
–
● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
● [
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [
2] tab (
=
20).
● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, and then
touch [OK].
● After displaying a scene to print as described in steps 2 – 5 of
“Viewing” (
=
103), you can also access the screen in step 1
here by touching [
] in the movie control panel.
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
Batch printing (
=
183) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
● RAW images cannot be included in print list.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number,
and other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the
print list.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Choose [Print Settings], and then press
the [
] button. On the next screen,
choose and congure items as needed.
182
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
182), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
114) to specify images.
z Touch [Order].
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Movies
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
182), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
z Touch [OK].
Clearing All Images from the Print List
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
182), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
z Touch [OK].
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Choose [Select Images & Qty.], and then
press the [
] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Drag left or right across the screen to
choose an image.
z If you specify index printing for the image,
it is labeled with a [
] icon. To cancel
index printing for the image, press the
[ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
3
Specify the number of prints.
z Touch [ ][ ] to specify the number of
prints (up to 99).
z To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat
steps 2 – 3.
z When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
183
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Adding Images Individually
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
183), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Choose an image after dragging left or
right to browse. Press the [ ] button.
z [
] is displayed.
z To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [
] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
z When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
183), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
z Touch [OK].
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
z When images have been added to the
print list (
=
181 –
=
182), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer.
Choose [Print now], and then simply
press the [ ] button to print the images
in the print list.
z Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and using CameraWindow to import them to your
computer (
=
175), where they are copied to their own folder. This is
convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing
photobooks with your own printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
184
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
183), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
z Touch [OK].
185
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
Appendix
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the ON/OFF button is pressed.
● Conrm that the battery pack is charged (
=
18).
● Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (
=
19).
● Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (
=
19).
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it o again (
=
19).
The battery pack is swollen.
● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or are not displayed on a TV (
=
172).
186
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Continuous shooting suddenly stops.
● Continuous shooting stops automatically after about 2,000 shots are taken at one
time. Release the shutter button a moment before you resume shooting.
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Subjects in shots look too dark.
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
89).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
73).
● Adjust brightness by using the Auto Lighting Optimizer (
=
76).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
73).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
33).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
73).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
73).
● Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (
=
36).
● Shoot within ash range (
=
211).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
90,
=
95).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
74).
Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Shoot within ash range (
=
211).
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
33).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
90,
=
95).
White spots appear in ash shots.
● This is caused by light from the ash reecting o dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
● Lower the ISO speed (
=
74).
● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (
=
53).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
● In Playback mode (
=
103), press the shutter button halfway (
=
26).
Strange display on the screen under low light (
=
27).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
- The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent
or LED lighting.
Full-screen display is not available while shooting (
=
47).
[
] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (
=
36).
[
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (
=
36).
● Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (
=
51).
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
89).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
74).
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [O] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (
=
51).
Shots are out of focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (
=
26).
● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (
=
210).
● Set [AF-assist beam ring] to [Enable] (
=
52).
● Conrm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (
=
84,
=
88).
Shots are blurry.
● Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending
on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
187
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Subjects are aected by red-eye.
● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (
=
52). The red-eye reduction lamp (
=
4)
will light up for ash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
● Edit images using red-eye correction (
=
123).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
162).
Shooting settings or Quick Set menu settings are not available.
● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions
Available in Each Shooting Mode”, “Quick Set Menu”, and “Shooting Tab”
(
=
195 –
=
200).
The Babies or Children icon is not displayed.
● The Babies and Children icons will not be displayed if the birthday is not set in
face information (
=
43). If the icons still are not displayed even when you set
the birthday, re-register face information (
=
43), or make sure that the date/
time is set correctly (
=
165).
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.
● Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.
Touch closer to the center of the screen.
● If [Screen auto-lock settings] is set to [Enable], unlock the touch-screen panel
(
=
167).
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(
=
162,
=
212).
[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
● The camera’s internal memory buer lled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
162).
- Lower the image quality (
=
49).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (
=
212).
Zooming is not possible.
● Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (
=
60).
● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [
] (
=
57) and [ ]
(
=
69) modes.
Subjects look distorted.
● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
Linear noise is recorded.
● Linear noise may be recorded if lights or other sources of bright light are visible
on the shooting screen in an otherwise dark scene. Recompose the shot so that
the bright light is not visible on the shooting screen or nearby.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
les or alter the folder structure.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (
=
162).
● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
● Adjust the volume (
=
23) if you have activated [Mute] (
=
166) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
● No sound is played for movies shot in [
] (
=
57), [ ] (
=
63,
=
69),
or [
] (
=
71) mode because audio is not recorded in these modes.
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen by touching [ ].
● Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the
camera from the printer.
● Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi
connection.
188
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Cannot add a device/destination.
● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera.
Erase unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new
devices/destinations (
=
158).
● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (
=
145).
● To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
your smartphone (
=
137).
● To add a computer, rst install the software CameraWindow on your
computer. Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings
(
=
140,
=
141).
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as
microwave ovens or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
● Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (
=
213). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
Cannot send images.
● The destination device has insucient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
● RAW images cannot be sent. For images captured in both JPEG and RAW
format, only the JPEG version is sent. However, RAW images can be sent using
Image Sync.
● Images cannot be sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if
you move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images
sent using Image Sync via an access point (
=
153). Before moving or renaming
these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Cannot resize images for sending.
● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their
original size.
● Movies cannot be resized.
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story
Highlights home screen.
● In simple information display mode (
=
105), choose an image that shows the
name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home
screen (
=
128).
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (
=
25).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
- While holding the shutter button and zoom lever toward [
], press the [ ]
button. In Playback mode, move the zoom lever toward [
], and on the next
screen, choose [B] and press the [
] button.
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu.
● In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnied display
or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the
Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or ltered image display
according to specied conditions. Cancel group or ltered image playback.
● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
189
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
No memory card
● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (
=
19).
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch
the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (
=
19).
Cannot record!
● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (
=
19).
Memory card error (
=
162)
● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (
=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(
=
19), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insucient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (
=
33,
=
53,
=
72,
=
92) or edit images (
=
120). Either erase unneeded images
(
=
115) or insert a memory card with enough free space (
=
19).
Touch AF unavailable
● Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode (
=
195).
Touch AF canceled
● The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (
=
88).
Charge the battery (
=
18)
No Image.
● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (
=
113)
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
sending time (
=
153).
● Movies may take a long time to send.
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as
microwave ovens or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
No notication message is received on a computer or smartphone after
adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.
● Make sure the email address you entered is correct, and try adding the
destination again.
● Check the email settings on the computer or smartphone. If they are congured to
block email from certain domains, you may not be able to receive the notication
message.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (
=
160).
190
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
A camera error was detected (error number)
● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
File Error
● Correct printing (
=
177) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
● Check the paper size setting (
=
179). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/
Unselectable image./No identication information
● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Edit ID Info* (
=
110), Magnify* (
=
111), Rotate* (
=
117), Favorites (
=
118),
Edit* (
=
120), Print List* (
=
181), and Photobook Set-up* (
=
183).
Invalid selection range
● When specifying a range for image selection (
=
114,
=
116,
=
182), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (
=
181) or Photobook Set-up
(
=
183). Choose 998 images or less.
● Print List (
=
181) or Photobook Set-up (
=
183) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (
=
113), Erase
(
=
115), Favorites (
=
118), Print List (
=
181), or Photobook Set-up
(
=
183).
Naming error!
● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [
1] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(
=
161), or format the memory card (
=
162).
Lens Error
● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
191
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Receiving failed
Insucient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sucient space.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked
position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insucient space on server
● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
● Save the images sent via Image Sync (
=
153) to your computer.
Check network settings
● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (
=
141).
● A device could not be found. Turn the camera o and on again, and retry the
connection.
● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously.
Try reconnecting again.
No access points found
● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
● Check the access point security settings (
=
141).
IP address conict
● Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens and other
devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Sending failed
Memory card error
● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
192
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
(19) Maximum continuous shots
(20) Movie quality (
=
49)
(21) Remaining time (
=
212)
(22) Histogram (
=
105)
(23) Quick Set menu (
=
28)
(24) Focus range (
=
81,
=
82),
AF lock (
=
88)
(25) AE lock (
=
73),
FE lock (
=
90)
(26) AF frame (
=
84),
Spot AE point frame (
=
73)
(27) Control ring function switching
(
=
96)
(28) Touch Shutter (
=
42)
(29) Manual focus switching (
=
82)
(30) Grid lines (
=
98)
(31) Shutter speed (
=
92,
=
93)
(32) Aperture value (
=
93)
(33) Electronic level (
=
50)
(34) Exposure level (
=
93)
(35) ISO speed (
=
74)
(36) Hybrid Auto mode (
=
35)
(37) Camera shake warning (
=
36)
(38) Zoom bar (
=
33)
(39) MF indicator (
=
82)
(40) Exposure compensation (
=
73)
(41) Wind filter (
=
68)
(42) Time zone (
=
165)
(43) Image stabilization (
=
51)
(44)
Auto level (
=
50)
(45)
Auto slow shutter (
=
68)
(46) Attenuator (
=
69)
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sucient charge
Slightly depleted, but sucient
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery
pack soon
[Charge the battery]
Depleted—charge the battery pack
immediately
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
6
)
(
8
)
(
7
)
(
10
)
(
14
)(
15
)(
16
) (
17
) (
18
) (
20
)(
21
) (
22
)
(
23
)
(
24
)
(
26
)
(
31
)
(
37
)
(
38
)
(
32
) (
34
)(
33
) (
35
)
(
44
) (
45
)
(
25
)
(
27
)
(
29
)
(
30
)
(
36
)
(
12
)
(
46
)(
42
) (
43
)
(
11
)
(
19
)
(
13
)
(
9
)
(
28
)
(
41
)
(
25
)
(
40
)
(
39
)
(1) Shooting mode (
=
195),
Scene icon (
=
37)
(2) Flash mode (
=
89)
(3) Flash exposure compensation /
Flash output level
(
=
90,
=
95)
(4) Metering method (
=
73)
(5) ND filter (
=
76)
(6) Drive mode (
=
42),
AEB shooting (
=
75),
Focus bracketing (
=
83)
(7) White balance (
=
77)
(8) High ISO speed noise reduction
(
=
75)
(9) Bluetooth connection status
(
=
133)
(10) Eco mode (
=
163)
(11) Picture Style (
=
79)
(12) Auto Lighting Optimizer (
=
76)
(13) Self-timer (
=
40)
(14) IS mode icon (
=
38)
(15) Battery level (
=
192)
(16) Still image compression (
=
47),
Recording pixel setting (
=
47)
(17) Recordable shots (
=
212)
(18) Zoom magnification (
=
39),
Digital tele-converter (
=
84)
193
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Info Display 2
(1) Shooting date/time (
=
20)
(2) Histogram (
=
105)
(3) Shooting mode (
=
195)
(4) Shutter speed (
=
92,
=
93)
(5) Aperture value (
=
93)
(6) Exposure compensation level
(
=
73)
(7) ISO speed (
=
74)
(8) Highlight tone priority (
=
76)
(9) White balance (
=
77)
(10) White balance correction
(
=
78)
(11) Picture Style setting details
(
=
79)
(12) Flash exposure compensation
(
=
90)
(13) Metering mode (
=
73)
(14) Auto Lighting Optimizer (
=
76)
(15) ND filter (
=
76), Short clip
playback effect (
=
69),
Miniature movie playback speed
(
=
57), Frame rate/interval time
of time-lapse movies (
=
69) or
star time-lapse movies (
=
63)
(16) High ISO speed noise reduction
(
=
75)
(17) Focus range (
=
81)
(18) Red-eye correction (
=
123)
(19) Image quality* (
=
47)
(20) Recording pixel setting (
=
212)
(21) Image size
* Cropped images are labeled with [
].
During Playback
Info Display 1
(1) Current image / Total images
(2) Battery level (
=
192)
(3) Wi-Fi signal strength (
=
132)
(4) Bluetooth connection status
(
=
133)
(5) Image Sync complete (
=
153)
(6) Edited*
1
(
=
120,
=
121,
=
122,
=
123)
(7) Favorites (
=
118)
(8) Protection (
=
113)
(9) Folder number – File number
(
=
161)
(10) Shutter speed (
=
92,
=
93)
(11) Aperture value (
=
93)
(12) Exposure compensation level
(
=
73)
(13) ISO speed (
=
74)
(14) Image quality*
2
(
=
47)
*1 Displayed for images with a creative lter, resizing, cropping, or red-eye
correction applied.
*2 Cropped images are labeled with [
].
194
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Info Display 3
Shows GPS information and an RGB histogram. Information on the top of
the screen is the same as for Info Display 2.
Info Display 4
Shows white balance information. Information on the top of the screen is
the same as for Info Display 2.
Info Display 5
Shows Picture Style information. Information on the top of the screen is
the same as for Info Display 2.
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
accessed as described in “Viewing” (
=
103).
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (
=
177).
Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][ ] to
adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
Play
Slow Motion (Touch [ ][ ] to adjust the playback speed.
No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (
=
127) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ]
button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (
=
127) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie (
=
106) is selected,
or an album without background music (
=
129))
Edit (
=
126)
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
● To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or drag left or right.
195
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
Exposure Compensation (
=
73)
*1
O O O O
– –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
ISO Speed
(
=
74)
AUTO *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
ISO 125 – 12800
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– –
Av/Tv Settings
(
=
92,
=
93)
Aperture Value *1
O O – – – – – – – – – – –
–
– – – – – – – – – – – O – –
Shutter Speed *1
O
–
O
– –
–
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– –
Bulb Exposure *1
O – – –
–
– – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
–
–
– – –
–
–
Program Shift (
=
73)
*1 *2 *2 *2
O – – –
– – – – –
–
– –
– – –
–
– – –
– – – *2
O
–
AE Lock/FE Lock in Standby*
3
(
=
73,
=
90)
O O O O O
– –
–
–
–
– – –
–
– –
– – –
–
– – –
–
O O O O O
Movie Audio Recording (
=
68)
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
–
O
–
O
AE Lock (during recording), Exposure
Compensation (
=
67,
=
73)
O O O O O – – O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O – O – O
AF Lock (when assigned to the movie button
(
=
98))
O O O O O – – O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – – –
AF Lock by touching during movie recording
(
=
67)
O O O O O
– –
O O
– – – –
O O
– – –
O O
– –
O
–
O
–
O
– –
Optical Zoom
O O O O O O O O O – – –
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
196
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
Manual Focus Switching When Recording Movies
(
=
67)
O O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O
–
O O
–
O O O O O
–
O
–
O O O
–
O
Move AF Frame
(
=
85)
Center *1
O O O O
– –
O O O O O O O O
–
O
–
O O O
–
O
–
O O O O O
Periphery *1
O O O O
– –
O O O
*4 *4 *4
O O
– – –
O O
– –
O
–
O O O O
–
Touch AF/Touch Active Frame (
=
88)
O O O O O O O O O O
*4 *4 *4
O O
– – –
O O
– –
O
–
O O O O
–
Face Select (
=
87)
O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
O O O O
–
O O O
–
O
– – – – – –
Touch Shutter (
=
42)
O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
O O O
*5 *5
O O
*5 –
O
*5 – – – – –
Change Shooting Display (
=
27)
O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
–
O
–
O
Manual Focus (
=
82)
*1
O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO speed may be changed
automatically to maintain suitable exposure.
*3 FE lock not available in [
] ash mode.
*4 Only when [
] is selected.
*5 Only available for shooting. Subject designation not available.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
197
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Quick Set Menu
Shooting Mode
Function
AF method
(
=
84)
+Tracking
*1
O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O
–
O O O
–
O
–
O O O
–
O
AF
*1
O O O O
– –
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
AF operation
(
=
86)
*1
O O O O O
*2
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1
O O O O
– – –
O
– – – – –
O
– – –
O O O
–
O
– – – – – –
Image quality (
=
47) See “Shooting Tab” (
=
200).
Movie rec. size
(
=
49)
When Set to
NTSC
*1 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
– –
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
–
O O O
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
–
O
– –
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
*3
O O O O O
– –
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
*3
O O O
–
O
– –
When Set to
PAL
*1 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
– –
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
–
O O O
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
*3
O O O O O
– –
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
*3
O O O
–
O
– –
Drive mode
(
=
42)
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1
O O O O
–
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
–
O
*1
O O O O
–
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
–
O
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
198
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
Self-Timer (
=
40)
/ / /
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Self-Timer Settings
Custom
Timer
Delay*
4
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Shots*
5
*1
O O O O
–
O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
Flash ring
(
=
89)
*1 – – –
O O O O
– – – – –
O O
–
O O O O O O
– – – – – – –
*1
O O O O
– –
O
–
O
– – –
O O
–
O O O O O O
– – – – – – –
*1 –
O
–
O
*6 *6 – – – – – – *6 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Flash Exp. Comp
(
=
90)
±0 *1
O O O O O O O
–
O
– – –
O O
–
O O O O O O
– – – – – – –
– ±2 *1
O O O O
– – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Flash Output
(
=
95)
Minimum/Medium/
Maximum
*1
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Still Image Aspect
Ratio (
=
47)
*1
O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O
– – – – – –
O
–
O
*7
O
*7
O O
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O
– – – – –
*1
O O O O
–
O O O O O O
– –
O
– – – – – –
O
–
O
*7 – *7 – –
*1
O O O O
–
O O O O O O
– –
O
– – – – – – – –
O
– – – – –
White balance
(
=
77)
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ / / / /
/
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
WB correction (
=
78)
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
199
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
Color Adjustment (
=
66)
– – – – – – – – –
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Set color temp. (
=
79)
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O
Picture Style
(
=
79)
*1
O O O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O
*1
O O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ / /
/ / /
/ /
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O
Auto Lighting
Optimizer (
=
76)
*1
O O O O
– – – –
O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
–
O
*1
O O O O O O O O
– – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
–
O
Metering mode
(
=
73)
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Focus Range
(
=
81,
=
82)
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1
O O O O
– –
O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
ND Filter (
=
76)
*1
O O O O O O
– –
O O O O O O
– –
O O O O
– –
O O O O O O
*1
O O O O
– –
O O
– – – – – –
O O
– – – –
O O
– – – – – –
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 [SERVO] when subject movement is detected.
*3 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (
=
47).
*4 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*5 One shot (cannot be modied) in modes without selection of the number of
shots.
*6 Not available, but switches to [
] in some cases.
*7 Set automatically to suit the aspect ratio of the movie recording size.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
200
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Tab
Shooting Mode
Function
1
Rec. Mode (
=
53,
=
55,
=
67)
– – – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Image
quality
(
=
47)
JPEG
– *1
O O O O
–
O O –
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
– O O O O O O
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ /
/ /
/
*1
O O O O
–
O O O –
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
RAW
– *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1
O O O O
–
O O –
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
– O O O O O O
Still Image Aspect Ratio (
=
47) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Shooting
information
display
(
=
98)
Screen
info/ toggle
settings
Shooting Info/
Histogram/
Grid display/
Electronic
level
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Grid display
Grid 1 [3x3] /
Grid 2 [6x4]
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Expo. simulation
(
=
73)
Enable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Disable *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Image review (
=
52)
O/Hold *1
O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
2 sec./
4 sec./
8 sec.
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
201
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
1
Touch
Shutter
(
=
42)
Touch
Shutter
Enable *1
O O O O O O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O
–
O O
– – – – –
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
AF frame
pos’n
Center/
Touch point
*1
O O O O
– –
O O
– – – –
O O
– – –
O O
– –
O O
– – – – –
Touch
shutter icon
On *1
O O O O O O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O
–
O O
– – – – –
O *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
2
Face ID
Settings
(
=
43)
Face ID On/O *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Add to
Registry
Add a New
Face/Add
Face Info
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Check/Edit Info *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Erase Info *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Set button
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
Settings
(
=
97)
Switch with
Enable/
Disable
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– –
Set Function *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– –
Quick setting menu layout (
=
99)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Digital
Zoom
(
=
39)
Standard *1
O O O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
–
O O O
O *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
1.6x/2.0x *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
202
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
3
AF operation (
=
86) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
AF method (
=
84) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
AF Frame Size*
2
(
=
85)
Normal *1
O O O O
– –
O O
– – – – –
O
–
O O
– –
O
– – –
O O O O O
Small *1
O O O O
– –
O O
– – – – –
O
–
O
– – –
O
– – –
O O O O O
Continuous AF (
=
86)
On *1
O O O O O O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
O *1
O O O O
– –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
Focus Range (
=
81,
=
82) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
AF+MF (
=
86)
On/O *1
O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
AF-assist beam ring
(
=
52)
Enable *1
O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
203
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
4*
5
MF-Point Zoom (
=
82)
O *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
5x/10x *1
O O O O
– –
O
– –
O O O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Safety MF (
=
82)
On *1
O O O O
– –
O
– – – – –
O O
–
O O
– –
O O O
–
O O O O O
O *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
MF
Peaking
Settings
(
=
83)
Peaking
On *1
O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
O *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Level Low/High *1
O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
Color
Red/
Yellow/
Blue
*1
O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
IS Settings
(
=
91)
IS Mode
O *1
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Continuous *1
O O O O O O O
– – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
Shoot Only *1
O O O O
– –
O O
– – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
Dynamic IS
Low *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Standard *1
O O O O O O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
–
O
–
O
High – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
–
O
Auto level (
=
50)
Enable *1
O O O O O O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
–
O
–
O
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Bracketing (
=
83)
BKT-O *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
AEB *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Focus-BKT *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
204
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
5
ISO speed
(
=
74)
ISO Speed
See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (
=
195).
ISO Auto
Settings
Max ISO
Speed
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– –
Rate of
Change
Standard
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Fast/
Slow
*1 –
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Highlight tone priority
(
=
76)
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Enable *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
– –
Auto Lighting Optimizer (
=
76) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Metering mode (
=
73) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
ND Filter (
=
76) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Flash
settings
(
=
52,
=
90,
=
91,
=
95)
Flash ring
See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Flash Mode
Auto *1
O O O O O O O
–
O
– – –
O O
–
O O O O O O
– – – – – – –
Manual *1
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Flash Exp. Comp
See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Flash Output
See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Shutter
Sync.
1st-curtain *1
O O O O O O O
–
O
– – –
O O
–
O O O O O O
– – – – – – –
2nd-curtain *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Red-Eye
Lamp
On/O *1
O O O O O O O
–
O
– – –
O O
–
O O O O O O
– – – – – – –
Safety FE
On *1
O O O O O O O
–
O
– – –
O O
–
O O O O O O
– – – – – – –
O *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Color Adjustment
See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
205
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
6
White balance (
=
77) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Custom WB (
=
77)
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O
–
WB correction (
=
78) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Picture Style (
=
79) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
High ISO speed NR
(
=
75)
Low/High *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Standard *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Spot AE Point
(
=
74)
Center/
AF Point
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Safety shift (
=
93)
On *1 –
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
7*
6
Drive mode
See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Self-Timer
See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Time-lapse
movie
settings
(
=
69)
Shooting
scene
Scene 1/
Scene 2/
Scene 3
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Interval/
Shots
1-4 sec./ 30-900
(Scene 1)
5-10 sec./ 30-720
(Scene 2)
11-30 sec./ 30-240
(Scene 3)
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Exposure
Fixed/
For each shot
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Review
image
Enable/Disable – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
206
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
7*
6
Star Time-
Lapse
Movie
Setting
(
=
63)
Save
Stills
Enable/
Disable
– – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Eect*
3
/ /
/ /
– – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Shot Interval
15 sec./
30 sec./
1 min.*
4
– – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Frame Rate
NTSC:
/ /
PAL:
/
– – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Shooting
Time
60 min./
90 min./
120 min./
Unlimited
– – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Auto
exposure
Lock to
1st shot/
For each shot
– – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Star Emphasis (
=
62)
Sharp/
Soft
– – – – – – – – –
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Star
Portrait
Settings
(
=
60)
Star Visibility
Standard
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Prominent – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
207
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
8
Movie rec. size (
=
49) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
197).
Wind Filter (
=
68)
Auto *1
O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
–
O
–
O
O *1
O O O O
– – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – –
O
– –
O O O O O
Attenuator (
=
69)
O/On *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
–
O
Auto *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Auto slow shutter
(
=
68)
Enable – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – –
Disable
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Digest Type (
=
35)
Include
Stills/
No Stills
– – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Available when the AF frame is set to [1-point AF].
*3 Available when still saving is set to [Disable].
*4 Available when the eect is set to [O].
*5 Items from the [
4] tab are shown on the [ 3] tab in [ ] mode.
*6 Items from the [
7] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes: [ ],
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[
]. Items from the [ 7] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in these modes:
[
], [ ], and [ ]. Items from the [ 7] tab are shown on the [ 4] tab in
[
] mode.
*7 Items from the [
8] tab are shown on the [ 7] tab in these modes: [ ],
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ]. Items
from the [
8] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ], and
[
]. Items from the [ 8] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in [ ] mode.
– When using Face ID (
=
43) in some modes or with some settings, names
of people may be recorded in shots even when not displayed.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
208
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Tab Item
Reference
Page
4
Touch Operation
=
167
Screen auto-lock settings
=
167
Units
=
167
Wi-Fi connect’n
=
132
Wireless settings
=
167
5
Certication Logo Display
=
168
Custom shooting mode (C)*
2
=
100
Copyright Info
=
168
Reset camera*
3
=
169
*1 Not available in these modes: [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
*2 Not available in these modes: [
], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
*3 Only [Other settings] is available in [
] mode.
My Menu Tab
Tab Item
Reference
Page
1
Add My Menu tab
=
101
Delete all My Menu tabs
=
102
Delete all items
=
102
Menu display
=
102
Set Up Tab
Tab Item
Reference
Page
1
Create Folder
=
161
File Numbering
=
161
Format
=
162
Video system
=
162
Electronic level
=
50
Start-up Image
=
166
2
Eco Mode
=
163
Power Saving
=
26
Disp. Brightness
=
164
Night Display
=
163
Time Zone
=
165
Date/Time
=
165
Lens Retraction
=
165
3
Language
=
166
Mute
=
166
Volume
=
166
Sound Options
=
166
Hints & Tips
=
167
Mode icon size/info*
1
=
167
209
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Tab Item
Reference
Page
4
Print settings
=
178
Photobook Set-up
=
183
5
Transition Eect
=
103
Index Eect
=
107
Scroll Display
=
103
Group Images
=
109
Auto Rotate
=
117
Resume
=
103
Image jump w/
=
109
6
Set Touch Actions
=
119
Playback information display
=
105
Playback Tab
Tab Item
Reference
Page
1
Protect
=
113
Rotate
=
117
Erase
=
115
Favorites
=
118
Slideshow
=
112
2
Story Highlights
=
128
List/Play Digest Movies
=
106
Short Clip Mix
=
131
Image Search
=
107
Creative lters
=
122
3
Resize
=
120
Cropping
=
121
Red-Eye Correction
=
123
Face ID Info
=
106
RAW img processing
=
124
210
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Specications
Image Sensor
Image size ........................................1.0 type
Camera Eective Pixels
(Pixels may decrease due to image
processing)
......................................... Approx. 20.1 megapixels
Total pixels ........................................ Approx. 20.9 megapixels
Lens
Focal Length
(35mm lm equivalent) .......................... 10.2 – 30.6 mm (28 – 84 mm)
Zoom Magnication ..........................3x
Shooting Range (measured from the tip of the lens)
Shooting
Mode
Focus
Range
Maximum Wide
Angle ( )
Maximum Telephoto
( )
–
5 cm ‒ innity
(2.0 in. – innity)
35 cm ‒ innity
(1.1 ft. – innity)
Other
modes
5 cm ‒ innity
(2.0 in. – innity)
35 cm ‒ innity
(1.1 ft. – innity)
*
5 – 50 cm
(2.0 in. ‒ 1.6 ft.)
–
* Not available in some shooting modes.
Step Zoom ........................................ 28mm, 35mm, 50mm, 84mm
Handling Precautions
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic elds, which may cause malfunction
or erase image data.
● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is dicult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove the
battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container.
To maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
211
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting
Digital zoom
Magnication.....................................Approx. 4x
Maximum with optical zoom..............Approx. 12x
Focal Length (Telephoto end,
35mm lm equivalent)
........................... Approx. 336 mm equivalent
ZoomPlus
(Number of recording pixels L) ................ Approx. 6x
Continuous Shooting
Shooting speed*
One-Shot AF
High-speed Continuous
shooting speed .........................Max approx. 8.1 shots/sec.
Servo AF
High-speed Continuous
shooting speed .........................Max approx. 5.3 shots/sec.
* Continuous shooting speed may become slower due to the following factors:
Tv value/Av value/Subject conditions/Lighting conditions/Use of ash/Zoom position
Shutter
Shutter Speed
Auto Mode (automatic settings)
Max. Tv ......................................... 1 sec.
Min. Tv .......................................... 1/2000 sec.
Range in all shooting modes
Max. Tv ......................................... 30 sec.
Min. Tv .......................................... 1/2000 sec.
Aperture
F number
Wide angle ........................................ 2.0 – 11.0
Telephoto .......................................... 4.9 – 11.0
Flash
Built-in Flash
Flash range (Max. wide angle)
closest point ..................................50.0 cm (1.6 ft.)
farthest point ................................. 6.0 m (20 ft.)
Flash range (Telephoto end)
closest point ..................................50.0 cm (1.6 ft.)
farthest point ................................. 2.4 m (7.9 ft.)
Monitor
Type ......................................................TFT color liquid crystal
Screen Size ..........................................7.5 cm (3.0 in.)
Eective Pixels......................................Approx. 1,040,000 dots
212
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Movies
Using a 16 GB (UHS-I) memory card
Pixels
Frame Rate/
Video System
Recordable time
per a memory card
(Approx.)
Single Clip
Recording
Time (Approx.)
(1920 x 1080)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
59 min. 30 sec. 10 min.
,
(NTSC)
(PAL)
1 hr. 26 min. 5 sec. 29 min. 59 sec.
(1280 x 720)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
4 hr. 5 min. 15 sec. 29 min. 59 sec.
(640 x 480)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
10 hr. 22 min. 35 sec. 1 hr.
● Limitations of movie shooting: continuous shooting is possible until
the memory card becomes full or the recording length for one movie
reaches approx. 29 minutes 59 seconds.
Power
Battery Pack ......................................... NB-13L
Number of Still
Image Shots (CIPA
Compliant)
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 235 shots
Number of Still Image
Shots (Eco Mode On)
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 315 shots
Movie Recording Time
(CIPA Compliant)
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 60 min.
Movie Recording Time
(Continuous Shooting)
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 95 min.
Playback Time* Approx. 5 hr.
* Time when playing back a slideshow of still images
Recording
File Format ............................................ DCF-compliant DPOF compatible
(Version1.1)
Data Type
Still Images
Recording Format ......................... Exif2.3 (DCF2.0)
Image
(RAW images taken while
shooting are A/D converted into
12-bit format.)
.................................. JPEG/RAW (CR2 a Canon 14-bit
RAW format)
Movies
Recording Format ......................... MP4
Video.............................................MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio ............................................MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo)
Recorded Pixels, Number of shots per a memory card
Still Images
Using a 16 GB (UHS-I) memory card (Approx. shots)
1786
2999
3982
6656
6073
11043
7712
RAW 525
RAW+JPEG 405
213
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Interface
Wired
Digital terminal
(Hi-Speed USB compliant) ....................Micro USB
HDMI OUT terminal ..........................Type D
Wireless
NFC ................................................. NFC Forum Type3/4 Tag compliant
(Dynamic)
Bluetooth
Compliance standards ................. Bluetooth Ver. 4.1
(Bluetooth low energy technology)
Wi-Fi
Compliance standards ................. IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Transmission frequency
Frequency ................................. 2.4 GHz
Channels .................................. 1 – 11
Security
Infrastructure mode ................. WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP), WEP
* Wi-Fi Protected Setup compliant
Camera access point mode ..... WPA2-PSK (AES)
Ad hoc mode ........................... WPA2-PSK (AES)
Operating Environment
Temperature ......................................... Min. 0 °C, max. 40 °C
(Min. 32 °F, max. 104 °F)
Dimensions (CIPA Compliant)
W .......................................................... 98.0 mm (3.9 in.)
H ........................................................... 57.9 mm (2.3 in.)
D ...........................................................31.3 mm (1.2 in.)
Weight (CIPA Compliant)
Camera Body Only ............................... Approx. 182 g (approx. 6.4 oz.)
Including Battery Pack, Memory Card
.... Approx. 206 g (approx. 7.3 oz.)
214
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Battery Pack NB-13L
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal voltage: 3.6 V DC
Nominal capacity: 1250 mAh
Charging cycles: Approx. 300 times
Operating temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Rated input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)
Rated output: 4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Charging time: Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)
Operating temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Rated input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.07 A (100 V) – 0.045 A (240 V)
Rated output: 5.0 V DC, 0.55 A
Charging time: Approx. 2 hr. 50 min.* (when charged with
NB-13L in the camera)
* Charging time varies greatly depending on the
remaining battery level.
Operating temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
● Size, weight, and number of shots available are based on
measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products
Association (CIPA).
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
215
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Index
A
Accessories 171
AEB shooting 75
AE lock 73
AF frames 84
AF lock 88
AF method 84
Art bold eect (shooting mode) 57
Aspect ratio 47
Auto Lighting Optimizer 76
Auto mode (shooting mode) 22, 33
Av (shooting mode) 93
B
Background defocus
(shooting mode) 59
Batteries
→
Date/time
(date/time battery)
Battery pack
Charging 18
Eco mode 163
Level 192
Power saving 26
Bluetooth 132
C
Camera
Reset all 169
Camera access point mode 139
Camera Connect 133
CameraWindow 175
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 145
Clock 32
Color (white balance) 77
Compression 47
Connecting via an access point 141
Continuous shooting 38, 42
Control ring 97
Control ring function
selector button 97
Creative lters 122
C (shooting mode) 100
Custom white balance 77
D
Date/time
Changing 21
Date/time battery 21
Settings 20
World clock 165
Defaults
→
Reset all
Digital tele-converter 84
Digital zoom 39
Display language 21
DPOF 181
Dragging 17
E
Eco mode 163
Editing
Red-eye correction 123
Editing or erasing connection
information 158
Electronic level 50
Erasing 115
Erasing all 115
Error messages 189
Exposure
AE lock 73
Compensation 73
FE lock 90
F
Face ID 43
Face select 87
Favorites 118
FE lock 90
File numbering 161
Fireworks (shooting mode) 54
Fish-eye eect (shooting mode) 56
Flash
Deactivating ash 89
Flash exposure compensation 90
On 89
Slow synchro 89
Focus bracketing 83
Focus check 111
Focusing
AF frames 84
AF lock 88
MF peaking 83
Servo AF 86
Touch AF 88
Focus lock 84
Focus range
Macro 81
Manual focus 82
G
Geotagging images 156
Grainy B/W (shooting mode) 60
Grid lines 98
H
Handheld night scene
(shooting mode) 54
HDMI cable 172
High dynamic range
(shooting mode) 55
High ISO speed noise reduction 75
I
iFrame movies (movie mode) 71
Image quality
→
Compression
Images
Display period 52
Erasing 115
Playback
→
Viewing
Protecting 113
Image stabilization 51, 91
Image Sync 153
Indicator 31, 52
ISO speed 74
J
Jump display 109
M
M (shooting mode) 93
Macro (focus range) 81
Magnied display 111
Manual (movie mode) 95
Memory cards 2
Recording time 212
Menu
Basic operations 29
Table 195
Metering method 73
Miniature eect (shooting mode) 57
216
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Movies
Editing 126
Recording time 212
N
ND lter 76
P
P (shooting mode) 72
Package contents 2
Panning (shooting mode) 55
Photobook set-up 183
Picture Style 79
Playback
→
Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 53
Power 171
→
Battery charger,
→
Battery pack
Power saving 26
Printing 177
Program AE 72
Protecting 113
Q
Quick Set menu
Table 197
R
RAW 48
RAW image processing 124
Recording pixels (image size) 47
Red-eye correction 123
Remote live view shooting 156
Reset all 169
Resizing images 120
Rotating 117
S
Saving images to a computer 176
Screen
Display language 21
Icons 192, 193
Menu
→
Quick Set menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→
Memory cards
Searching 107
Self-timer 40
2-second self-timer 41
Customizing the self-timer 41
Sending images 150
Sending images to
another camera 150
Sending images to a smartphone 133
Sending images to Web services 145
Servo AF 86
Shooting
Shooting date/time
→
Date/time
Shooting information 98, 192
Short clips (movie mode) 69
Slideshow 112
Soft focus (shooting mode) 59
Software
Installation 140, 176
Saving images to
a computer 176
Sounds 166
Standard (movie mode) 67
Star (shooting mode) 60
Star nightscape
(shooting mode) 62
Star time-lapse movie
(shooting mode) 63
Star trails (shooting mode) 62
Story Highlights 128
Strap 2, 18
T
Terminal 172, 177
Time-lapse movie (movie mode) 69
Touch Actions 119
Touch AF 88
Touching 17
Touch-screen panel 17
Touch Shutter 42
Toy camera eect
(shooting mode) 58
Traveling with the camera 165
Troubleshooting 185
TV display 172
Tv (shooting mode) 92
V
Viewing 23
Image search 107
Index display 107
Jump display 109
Magnied display 111
Single-image display 23
Slideshow 112
TV display 172
W
Water painting eect
(shooting mode) 57
White balance (color) 77
Wi-Fi 132
Wind lter 36
Wireless features 132
World clock 165
Wrist strap
→
Strap
Z
Zoom 22, 34, 39, 40
217
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
● Do not use the wireless function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may aect operation of those devices.
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
● Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
● Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
Precautions for Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or
Others)
● Countries and Regions Permitting Wireless Function Use
- Use of wireless functions is restricted in some countries and
regions, and illegal use may be punishable under national or local
regulations. To avoid violating wireless regulations, visit the Canon
website to check where use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
wireless function use in other countries and regions.
● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certication labels from the product
● Before goods or technologies in the camera regulated by the Foreign
Exchange and Foreign Trade Act are exported (which includes
bringing them outside Japan or showing them to non-residents in
Japan), export or service transaction permission may be required from
the Japanese government.
● Because this product includes American encryption items, it falls under
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or
brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
● Be sure to make notes of the Wi-Fi settings you use.
The wireless settings saved to this product may change or be erased
due to incorrect operation of the product, the eects of radio waves or
static electricity, or accident or malfunction.
Please note that Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or
indirect damages or loss of earnings resulting from a degradation or
disappearance of content.
● When transferring ownership, disposing of the product, or sending it
for repair, restore the default wireless settings by erasing any settings
you have entered.
● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
218
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Personal Information and Security Precautions
If personal information and/or Wi-Fi security settings, such as passwords,
etc., are saved on the camera, please be aware that such information and
settings may still remain in the camera.
When transferring the camera to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to take the following measures to prevent the
leakage of such information and settings.
● Erase registered personal information by choosing [Erase Info] in the
Face ID settings.
● Erase registered Wi-Fi security information by choosing [Reset
Settings] in the Wi-Fi settings.
Trademarks and Licensing
● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
● The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
● The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is
under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their
respective owners.
● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
● Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
Third-Party Software
● expat.h
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation les (the “Software”),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software
is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
219
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Disclaimer
● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may dier slightly from the
actual equipment.
● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
3 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Canon-PowerShot-G9X-Mark-II

  • Ik krijg na een foto te hebben gemaakt gelijk het scherm daarna met met alle info ober de gemaakte foto. Ik zou graag dit willen uitzetten, kan dit? Groet, Jan Gesteld op 7-10-2021 om 18:23

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

  • hoe foto's van de camera in de computer invoeren - ik heb het honderden keren gedaan maar nu lukt het niet - Gesteld op 2-11-2020 om 11:48

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

    • Via een mini USB kabel aansluiting met aan de andere kant een gewone USB aansluiting aansluiten op een USB poort. Menu start: Deze computer, camera kiezen.
      alle beelden worden getoond die gemaakt zijn en dan kan je de hele serie in een map zetten in mijn documenten. Geantwoord op 2-11-2020 om 12:04

      Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

  • Ik heb met een Canon G9X Mark II een probleem om via WiFi contact te maken met mijn pc.
    Ik "zie" met de Canon via mijn WiFi-netwerk de pc en op de pc verschijnt ook de Canon maar niet als schijf en kan het niet openen. De camera geeft uiteindelijk "connectie mislukt" o.i.d.
    De firewall en de virusscanner van de pc staan uit. Gesteld op 3-6-2017 om 22:51

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Canon PowerShot G9X Mark II bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Canon PowerShot G9X Mark II in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 17,22 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Canon PowerShot G9X Mark II

Canon PowerShot G9X Mark II Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 219 pagina's

Canon PowerShot G9X Mark II Snelstart handleiding - Nederlands - 11 pagina's

Canon PowerShot G9X Mark II Snelstart handleiding - Deutsch - 11 pagina's

Canon PowerShot G9X Mark II Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 219 pagina's

Canon PowerShot G9X Mark II Snelstart handleiding - English - 11 pagina's

Canon PowerShot G9X Mark II Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 219 pagina's

Canon PowerShot G9X Mark II Snelstart handleiding - Français - 11 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info